6«foª\u'n];gsf] lgb]{zg k'l:tsf

v08 ! – If]qLo sfo{ @)##

k'gM d'b|0f @)^( ;DaGwdf

gfkL ljefu, tTsflng lhof]8]l6s gfkL dxfzfvfaf6 @)## df k|sflzt 6«foª\u'n];gsf]

lgb]{zg k'l:tsf df}Hbft g/x]sf]n] o;} lgb]{lzsfnfO{ k'gM d'b|0f ug'{ k/]sf] xf] . o; lgb]{lzsfdf
>L % sf] ;/sf/ elgPsf] 7fp“df g]kfn ;/sf/ His Majesty's Government
of Nepal, H.M.G. elgPsf] 7fp“df Government of Nepal, clw/fHo elgPsf]
7fp“df /fHo / Kingdom elgPsf] 7fp“df Nation elg a'e\mg' x'g xflb{s cg'/f]w
ul/G5 .

cfiff9 @)^( gfkL ljefu

1
 Government of Nepal
Survery Department

Geodetic Survey Branch

TRIANGULATION INSTRUCTION
BOOK

PART I - FIELD WORK

Kathmandu
October-November 1976

2
 g]kfn ;/sf/
gfkL ljefu
vuf]n tyf e"dfkg dxfzfvf

6«foª\u'n];gsf] lgb]{zg k'l:tsf

v08 ! — If]qLo sfo{

sf7df08"
sflt{s—dfu{ @)##
3
First edition : Kathmandu, October–November 1970
Second edition : Kathmandu, October–November 1976

4
k|yd ;+:s/0f M sf7df08" sflt{s—dfu{ @)@&
låtLo ;+:s/0f M sf7df08" sflt{s—dfu{ @)##

5
CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO THE WORK OF

THE TRIGONOMETRICAL DIVISION

CHAPTER 2 SPHEROID, PROJECTION, N U M B E R I N G

OF THE MAPS AND NUMBERING OF
TRIGONOMETRICAL STATIONS IN THE
KINGDOM OF NEPAL

CHAPTER 3 RECONNAISSANCE

CHAPTER 4 MONUMENTATION

CHAPTER 5 DESCRIPTION CARD

CHAPTER 6 SIGNALLING

CHAPTER 7 CUTTING TREES

CHAPTER 8 OBSERVATION

CHAPTER 9 CARE, ADJUSTMENT AND MAINTENANCE

OF THE THEODOLITES

CHAPTER 10 FIELD PLOTTING

CHAPTER 11 FIELD COMPUTATION


APPENDIXES
ljifo ;"lr M

cWofo ! lqsf]0fldtLo zfvfsf] sfo{sf] kl/ro

cWofo @ pkuf]n, k|nDatf, g]kfn clw/fHodf lqsf]0fldtLo
cj:yfgx¿ tyf dfglrqx¿sf] ;+VofFsg
cWofo # k"j]{If0f
cWofo $ :df/s lrGx uf8\g]
cWofo % ljj/0f sf8{
cWofo ^ lgzfg lrGx b]vfpg]
cWofo & ¿vx¿ sf6\g]
cWofo * ;j]{If0f
cWofo ( lyof]8f]nfO6sf] :ofxf/, dd{t
cWofo !) If]qLo c+sg ug]{
cWofo !! If]qLo sDk'6]zg


kl/lzi6x¿
1. INTRODUCTION TO THE WORK OF THE
TRIOGONOMETRICAL DIVISION

The main task of the Trigonometrical Division is to establish a

framework of trigonometrical stations over the whole country,
excluding the area over 4,000 m above sea level.
Trigonometrical stations with known coordinates are required for:
– land reform and land revenue,
– boundary survey,
– mining, irrigation, transport etc.
– all kind of maps such as:
cadastral maps,
topographical maps,
road maps etc.
The distance between these stations depends upon the use to be made
of them. For example for road projects perhaps a distance of 100 m is
sufficient but for ground survey control a distance of 2 km would be
desirable. The position of these stations must be related to each other,
that means the position of the stations must be defined by coordinates
on the same coordinate system. There are small inaccuracies in all
measurements. If the number of measurements increases , these
inaccuracies become smaller, but there will still always be a small
inaccuracy left. So as not to enlarge these inaccuracies, we start with
a framework of very large triangles (basic first order framework)
and continue constantly to reduce these triangle to smaller ones, till
the desired density of stations is reached (fourth order framework).

8
!= lqsf]0fldtLo zfvfsf] sfo{x¿sf] kl/ro

lqsf]0fldtLo zfvfsf] d'Vo sfd b]zel/ lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?sf] cfwf/

/rgf :yfkgf ug'{ xf] . t/ $,))) ld6/eGbf pFrf 7fpFx¿df cj:yfg
agfpg d'lZsn kg]{ x'Fbf To:eGbf pFrf 7fpFnfO{ 5fl8G5 .
lgofds yfxf ePsf cj:yfgx¿ lgDg lnlvt sfo{x¿sf] nflu cfjZos
kb{5g\ M
– e"ld ;'wf/ tyf dfnkf]t lt/f]
– ;Ldf gfkL
– vfgL, l;+rfO{, oftfoft O=
– ;a} k|sf/sf] dfglrqx¿ tof/ ug{ h:t} M
lsQf gfkLsf] gS;f
tn ¿k gfkL dfglrq
;8ssf dfglrqx¿ O=
s'g} b'O cj:yfgx¿sf] aLrsf] b"/L ltgLx¿nfO{ k|of]udf NofOg]df e/ kb{5 .
h:t} ;8s of]hgfx¿sf] nflu !)) ld= sf] b"/L 7Ls 5 eg] e"ld gfkL ug{sf]
nflu @ ls=ld= dgfl;a xf]nf . oL b'a} cj:yfgx¿sf] l:ylt Ps csf]{;+u
;DalGwt x'g'kb{5 . To;sf] dtna tL cj:yfgx¿sf] l:ylt Ps} lsl;dsf]
lgofds k|0ffnL åf/f kl/eflift x'g'kb{5 . k|To]s gfkLdf s]xL g s]xL cz'4tf
x'G5 . olb gfksf] ;+Vof a9fOof] eg] cz'4tf sd eP/ hfG5 . t}klg s]xL g
s]xL cz'4tf /xL g} /xG5 . o;sf/0f oL cz'4tfx¿nfO{ ga9fpg xfdLn] 7"nf]
7"nf] lqsf]0fx¿sf] cfwf/ /rgf -cfwf/e"t k|yd bhf{ cfwf/ /rgf_ af6 sfd
z'¿ ub{5f}+ / tL lqsf]0fx¿ xfdLnfO{ rflxPsf] cj:yfgx¿sf] 3gTj gk'u];Dd
-rf}yf] bhf{sf] cfwf/ /rgf_ :ofgf] kfb}{ n}hfG5f}+ .

9
To establish a trigonometrical framework we must first find the
positions of our basic first order trogonometrical stations and then
we have to construct a permanent mark at each selected position (see
chapter 4. MONUMENTATION). The fundamental (origin) station
has to be selected on which astronomical observations must be
made in order to get geographical coordinates (longitude, latitude).
Afterwards for the orientation of this basic first order framework we
select a few astronomical (Laplace) stations, of which there are six in
Nepal. It will also be necessary to measure some distances between
our basic first order trigonometrical stations to get the precise size of
the system.
For our purpose we need rectangular coordinates. That means we
have to project the surface of the earth to a plane . This is not possible
without any distortion at all. So we have to look for projection where
this distortion is negligible. There are different projections. For our
proposes the Universal -Transverse - Mercator (UTM) projection
is very suitable and is being generally adopted internationally (the
principle of this projection is explained in chapter 2). So by these
steps we obtain the exact location of the station on the surface of the
earth i.e their rectangular coordinates.

ASTRONOMICAL STATION
BASIC FIRST ORDER STATION
FIRST ORDER STATION
SECOND ORDER STATION
= MEASURED DISTANCE
fig. 1
Another task of Trigonometrical Division is also to supply the
Revenue Survey Party with plastic sheets and description cards
(identity cards) of each trigonometrical station from a required

10
lqsf]0fldtLo cfwf/ /rgf :yfkgf ug{ xfdLn] cfwf/e"t k|yd bhf{sf] lqsf]0fldtLo
cj:yfgx?sf] l:yltx¿ kQf nufpF5f}+ . To;kl5 5flgPsf :yfgx¿df
:yfoL lrGx agfp5f}+ -cWofo $, :df/s lrGx uf8\g] ljifodf x]g'{;\_ d"ne"t
cj:yfg ef}uf]lns lgofds -cIff+;, b]zfGt/_ yfxf kfpgsf] lglDt vuf]lno
;j]{If0f ug{ x'g] :yfgnfO{ 5flgg'kb{5 . To;kl5 cfwf/e"t k|yd bhf{sf] cfwf/
/rgf cg':yfkgfsf] nflu xfdL s]xL vuf]nLo cj:yfg -nfknf; cj:yfg_
5fGb5f}+ . oL vuf]lno cj:yfgx¿ g]kfndf ^ j6f 5g\ . k|0ffnLsf] kl/z'4
;fOh kfpg xfd|f] s]xL cfwf/e"t k|yd bhf{sf] lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx¿sf]
aLrsf] b"/L gfKg cfjZos kb{5 .
xfd|f] sfdsf] nflu xfdLnfO{ cfoflto lgofdssf] cfjZostf kb{5 . To;sf]
dtna xfdLn] k[YjLsf] ;txnfO{ k|nDag ug'{k5{ . of] slQ klg ljs[lt ljgf ug{
d'lZsn 5 . o;sf/0f xfdLn] o:tf k|nDatf vf]Hg'k/Øf] h;df ljs[lt guGo
xf];\ . k|nDatf w]/} k|sf/sf 5g\ . xfd|f] sfdsf] nflu ljZjel/ dflgcfPsf]
o'lge;{n 6«fG;e;{ d/s]6/ k|nDatf ;'xfpFbf] 5 / ;fwf/0ftof cGt//fli6«o
tj/n] 5flgPsf] 5 -o;sf] l;4fGt cWofo @ df j0f{g ul/Psf] 5_ . oL
t/Lsfaf6 xfdLn] k[YjLsf] ;txsf cj:yfx¿sf] 7Ls l:ylt kQf nufp5f}+ .
cyf{t tL cj:yfgx¿sf] cfoflto lgofds kQf nufpF5f}+ .

vf}uf]nLo cj:yfg
cfwf/e"t klxnf] bhf{sf] cj:yfg
klxnf] bhf{sf] cj:yfg
bf];|f] bhf{sf] cj:yfg
= gfkLPsf] b"/L

lrq !
lqsf]0fldtLo zfvfsf c¿ sfo{x¿ lsQf gfkLnfO{ rflxPsf] If]qdf
kg{] cj:yfgx¿sf] ljj/0f sf8{ / Knfli6s tfpm pknJw u/fpg' xf] .
k|To]s Knfli6s tfpmdf $ b]lv ^ cj:yfgx¿ c+sg ul/Psf] x'g'kb{5 .
11
working area. On each plastic sheet 4-6 trigonometrical stations
are plotted. For this reason these trigonometrical stations have to
be established mainly in cultivated areas, since in Nepal only the
cultivated land is taxed and therefore important for Revenue Survey
Party.
Note : Remember that the Trigonometrical Division
– only works with the metric system,
– uses the unit called the gon (the circle is divided into 400
gons) for angle measurement,
– writes all numbers in arabic figures only.

12
o;sf/0fn] ubf{ oL lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx¿ vf; u/]/ cfjfbL hUufdf
:yfkgf ug'{kb{5 . lsgeg] g]kfndf cfjfbL hUufdf dfq lt/f] lng] u/]sf] 5
t;y{ gfkL uf]Zjf/fsf] nflu dxTjk"0f{ 5 .
l6Kk0fL M ofb /fVg';\ ls — lqsf]0fldtLo zfvfn] d]l6«s k|0ffnLdf dfq sfd
ub{5 . sf]0f gfKgsf] nflu PsfO{ uf]g x'G5 -h;df j[Q $)) uf]gdf
ljefhg ul/Psf] 5_ . ;a} ;+Vof -gDa/x¿_ c/]ljs lnlkdf
n]lvG5 .

13
2. SPHEROID PROJECTION, NUMBERING OF THE
MAPS AND NUMBERING OF TRIGONOMETRICAL
STATIONS IN THE KINGDOM OF NEPAL

2.1 Spheroid
The earth is a solid body with its surface differing place by place
(mountains, valleys, plains, seas and oceans). To form an accurate
and as simple a relation as possible between points on the earth's
surface a reference body should be found. Ideally such a body is the
geoid, which is the name for the earth's mathematical (hydrostatic)
surface. We can imagine the geoid in such way that it is a calm level of
all seas and oceans connected with a dense system of canals crossing
continents and large islands. But even the geoid is a body much too
complicated for the routine calculation of trigonometrical survey.
Therefore the geoid is subtituted by a very similar body, the so called
spheroid (rotary ellipsoid). In total there are twelve spheroids which
are used round the world. The first- Everest- spheroid was defined in
the year 1830, the other spheroids originated later with the progress
of the science and technique. Nevertheless the differences between
them all are not large and their major and minor semi-axes differ
by only small amounts. In spite the fact that the Everest spheroid is
the first and therefore the oldest one, it was selected for the use in
Nepal. The main reason for that decision was that the neighbouring
countries (India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka) used Everest
spheroid and they are all still using it. It was of a great importance
that Nepal accepted the Everest spheroid for the future connection
of Nepalese trigonometrical framework with the trigonometrical

14
@= pkuf]n, k|nDatf, g]kfn clw/fHodf lqsf]0fldlto
ca:yfgx¿ tyf dfglrqx¿sf] ;+Vof+sg

@=! pkuf]n
k[YjL Pp6f o:tf] 7f]; lk08 xf] h;sf] ;tx 7fpF 7fFpdf km/s x'G5 -kj{t,
pkTofsfx¿, t/fO{, ;d'b| tyf ;fu/x¿_ . k[YjLsf] ;txdf ePsf ljGb"x¿sf]
aLrsf] ;DaGw ;s];Dd z'4 / ;/n agfpg s'g} lgb]{z lk08 kQf nufpg'kb{5 .
jf:tjdf To:tf] lk08 e"–¿k xf], h'g k[YjLsf] ul0ftLo ;tx -t/n :ylts ;tx_
sf] gfd xf] . xfdLn] e"–¿knfO{ o; k|sf/ sNkgf ug{ ;S5f}+ ls of] ;d'b| ;fu/
x¿sf] zfGt ;tx;+u 3gf gx/ k|0ffnLn] dxfåLk tyf 7"nf 7"nf 6fk'x¿nfO{
sfl6P/ hf]l8Psf] x'G5 . t/ e"–¿k klg o:tf] lk08 xf] h;df lqsf]0fldtLo
gfkLsf] lgoldt lx;fasf] lglDt d'lZsn 5 . To;sf/0f e"–¿knfO{ p:t}
lk08åf/f k|lt:yflkt ul/Psf] 5, h;nfO{ pkuf]n elgG5 . hDdf !@ pkuf]nx¿
5g\ h'g ;+;f/e/ k|of]udf NofOPsf 5g\ . k|ydtM Pe/]i6 pkuf]n !*#) df
kl/eflift ul/Psf] lyof] . c¿ pkuf]nx¿ k|ljlw / lj1fgsf] k|ultsf] ;fy
;fy} kl5 pTklQ ePtf klg ltgLx¿sf] aLrdf 7"nf] leGgtf 5}g . ltgLx¿sf]
d'Vo / n3' cw{ cIfdf yf]/} dfq km/s k5{ . jf:tjdf Pe/]i6 pkuf]n kl5Nnf]
/ ;aeGbf k'/fgf] ePsf] x'Fbf g]kfndf k|of]usf] lglDt 5flgPsf] lyof] .
To; lg0f{osf] d'Vo sf/0f lyof] ls l5d]sL /fi6«x¿ -ef/t, kfls:tfg,
a+unf b]z, >Ln+sf_ n] Pe/]i6 pkuf]n k|of]udf NofPsf lyP / cem klg k|of]u
ul//x]sf 5g\ . eljiodf g]kfnL lqsf]0fldtLo cfwf/ /rgfnfO{ l5d]sL
/fi6«x¿sf] cfwf/ /rgf;+u hf]8\g Pe/]i6 pkuf]n lng' a8f] dxTjk"0f{ lyof] .

15
frameworks of her neighbours. Everest spheroid is defined by major
semi-axis "a" and minor semi-axis "b" as follows:

b
a a a = 6 377 276.345 metres
b = 6 356 075.413 metres

fig. 2

2.2 Projection
As all measurements of angles and distances are made on
the earth we have to project the surface of the Earth on the
spheroid and then to project it onto a plane again. There are
several systems of projecting the surface of the spheroid onto a
plane. As mentioned in chapter 1, the Universal Transverse Mercator
(UTM) projection is used in Nepal. In the the UTM system a cylinder
is put around the earth (spheroid) in such way that it touches the
earth along two meridians which differ by 180°. The centre of the
projection is in the middle of the earth. For our purpose only that
part of the cylinder is taken which touches one meridian only, the
so called central meridian. Then the points are projected from the
surface of the earth onto the spheroid and then from it projected onto
this part of cylinder. After projection the cylinder is cut parallel to
its axis through the north and south poles and rolled open so that it
forms a plane, onto which the central meridian is projected with its
actual length.

16
Pe/]i6 pkuf]n d'Vo cw{ cIf a / n3' cw{ cIf b åf/f o; k|sf/ kl/eflift
ul/G5 .

b
a a a = ^ #&& @&^= #$% ld6/
b = ^ #%^ )&%= $!# ld6/
b

lrq @

@=@= k|nDatf
;a} sf]0f / b"/Lsf gfkx¿ k[YjLdf ul/Psf] x'gfn] k[YjLsf] ;txnfO{ pkuf]ndf
k|nDag ug'{k5{ / To;kl5 o;nfO{ ;d ;txdf k|nDag ug'{k5{ . pkuf]nsf]
;tx ;d–;txdf w/} k|0ffnLx¿n] k|nDag ul/G5 . cWofo ! df pNn]v ul/P
em}+ o'lge;{n 6«fG;e;{ d/s]6/ k|nDatf g]kfndf k|of]u ul/Psf] 5 . o"=l6=Pd\=
k|0ffnLdf Pp6f /De o; k|sf/n] k[YjLdf jl/kl/ /flvG5 ls o;n] k[YjLdf
b'O{ b]zfGt/ /]vfnfO{ 5'G5 h'g !*)° n] km/s k5{ . k|nDatfsf] s]Gb| k[YjLsf]
s]Gb|df x'G5 . xfd|f] sfdsf] nflu /Desf] To; efunfO{ dfq lnOPsf] 5 h;n]
Pp6f b]zfGt/ /]vfnfO{ 5'G5 h;nfO{ s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vf dflgG5 . ta
k[YjLsf] ;txaf6 pkuf]ndf k|nDag ul/G5 / To;kl5 o;af6 /Desf] o;
efudf k|nDag ul/G5 . k|nDatfkl5 /DenfO{ o;sf] pQ/L / blIf0fL w|'jaf6
eP/ uPsf] cIfsf] ;dfgfGt/ u/L sfl6G5 / o;/L km'sfOG5 ls o;n] Pp6f
;d ;tx agfpF5 h:df s]lGb|o b]zfGt/ /]vf o:sf] jf:tljs nDafO{sf ;fy
k|nDag x'G5 .

17
 dp

ds

dsp

fig. 3

Legend :
ds actual (slope) distance on the earth's surface
dsp distance converted to the spheroid
dp distance on the projection plane
The farther we go on the projection from central meridian, the
bigger the differences become between the distance "dsp" (on the
surface of the spheroid) and the distance "dp" (on the projection
plane). The difference is called the length distortion.
In the case of the cylinder touching the earth (spheroid)- as mentioned
previously- the length distortion along the central meridian is zero
(and so the central meridian is projected in its actual length) while
the length distortion 1.08 metres for the distance of 1 kilometre is
at 3° of longitude from the central meridian. From the fig. 3 we
can see that the actual distance "ds" measured on the surface of
the earth is projected as a distance "dsp" on the spheroid and as a
distance "dp" on the cylinder. Just form the figure it is possible to
see how the value of the length distortion increases. That shows that
this projection can be extended only in such areas within which the
length distortion remains negligible. Such areas are called zones and
are limited by the meridians symmetrical to the central meridian.

18
 s]lGb|o dWofGx /]vf

lrq #
;+s]t lrGxx¿M
ds k[YjLsf] ;txdf jf:tljs -le/fnf]_ b"/L
dsp pkuf]ndf kl/jt{g ul/Psf] b"/L
dp k|nDatf–;d ;txsf] b"/L

htL xfdL s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfaf6 6f9f hfG5f}+ pltg} pkuf]nsf] ;txsf] b"/L
ædspÆ -k|nDjtf ;d ;tx_ sf] b"/L ædpÆ a9\b} hfG5 . To; cGt/nfO{ nDafO{
ljs[lt elgG5 .
cufl8 pNn]v ul/Psf] /Den] k[YjL -pkuf]n_ nfO{ b]zfGt/ /]vfdf 5f]O/x]sf]df
s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfdf k/]sf] nDafO{ ljs[lt ;'Ggf x'G5 jf nDafO{ ljs[lt x'Fb}g
-/ o;sf/0f s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vf o;sf] jf:tljs nDafOdf k|nDag ul/Psf]
x'G5_ ha ls s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/af6 #° b]zfGt/sf] ! lsnf] ld6/ b"/Ldf !=)*
ld6/sf] nDafO{ ljs[lt x'G5 . lrq # af6 xfdLn] a'‰g ;S5f}+ ls k[YjLsf]
;txdf gflkPsf] jf:tljs b"/L ædsÆ pkuf]ndf b"/L ædspÆ eP/ k|nDatf ;d
;txdf b"/L ædpÆ eP/ k|nDag x'G5 . lrqaf6 g} s;/L nDafO{ ljs[ltsf]
dfqf a9\5 eGg] a'lemG5 . o;n] of] k|i6 x'G5 ls of] k|nDatf To; If]qx¿df
dfq a9fpg ;lsG5 h;leq nDafO{ ljs[lt gu0o /xG5 . To:tf If]qx¿nfO{
e"sl6jGwx¿ elgG5g\ / s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vf;+u ;dldlt b]zfGt/ /]vfn]
;Lldt ul/Psf 5g\ . vf; u/]/ ^° / # ° b]zfGt/ /]vfsf] e"sl6aGwx¿ k|of]u
19
Mainly the zones of 6° and 3° of longitude are used. The zone of
6° means that it covers an area of 3° on both sides of the central
meridian while the zone of 3° means that it covers an area of 1°30'
on both sides of the central meridian. In the effort to minimize the
actual value of the length distortion a special value of the scale factor
was introduced.
The scale factor is a coefficient. The measured distance " ds"
is converted to the distance on the spheroid "dsp" and then it is
multiplied by scale factor in order to get the distance in the UTM
projection. The value of the scale factor varies. It is at its smallest
if the distance lies in the central meridian and increases the farther
from the central meridian the distance lies. If the scale factor is
equal to 1 at the central meridian it means the distance in the central
meridian is projected in its actual length. This is the case when the
cylinder is touching the earth. When the scale factor at the central
meridian chosen is less than 1 the cylinder is smaller and cuts the
surface of the earth in two meridians symmetrical to the central
meridian. These "two meridians" are actually the small circles only.
But for simple imagination of observers instead of small circles "the
meridians" were used. With the careful choice of the scale factor we
can decrease the actual value of the length distortion. In such a way
the scale factor 0.9996 at the central meridian was internationally
chosen for the zones of 6° of longitude. Then the length distortion
is as follows :
a) - 0.40 metres for the
distance of 1 kilometre
in the central meridian.
b) + 0.68 metres for the
distance of 1 kilometre
at the edges of the zone
(that is 3° west and east
of the central meridian)
c) 0.00 metres at 1°49' west
and east of the central
meridian - here the
fig. 4 cylinder cuts the earth.

20
ul/G5g\ . ^° sf] e"sl6jGwsf] dtnj Tof] xf] ls o;n] s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/
/]vfsf] b'a}lt/ #° sf] If]q 9fS5 hals #° sf] e"sl6jGwsf] dtnj o;n] s]Gb|Lo
b]zfGt/ /]vfsf] b'a}lt/ !°#)Ú sf] If]q lnG5 . nDafO{ ljs[ltsf] jf:tljs dfg
sd ug]{ tfTko{ cg'dfk v08sf] ljz]if dfg :yflkt ul/Psf] lyof] .
cg'dfk v08 Pp6f u'0fs xf] . gflkPsf] b"/L ædsÆ pkuf]nsf] b"/Ldf ædspÆ
kl/jt{g ul/G5 / To;kl5 o"=6L=Pd\= k|nDjtfdf b"/L kfpgsf] nflu cg'dfk
v08n] u'0ff ul/G5 . cg'dfk v08sf] dfg km/s km/s x'G5 . olb b"/L s]Gb|Lo
b]zfGt/ /]vfdf kb{5 eg] of] Go"g x'G5 . olb b"/L s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfsf] k/
k5{ eg] a9\b} hfG5 . olb s]lGb|o b]zfGt/ /]vfdf cg'dfk v08 a/fa/ ! 5 eg]
o;sf] dtnj s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfdf b"/L jf:tljs nDafO{df k|nDag ul/Psf]
5 . of] To; cj:yfdf x'G5 ha /Den] k[YjLnfO{ b]zfGt/ /]vflt/ 5f]O/x]sf]
x'G5 . ha s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfdf cg'dfk v08 ! eGbf sd eof] eg] /De
emg\ ;fgf] x'G5 / /Den] k[YjLsf] ;txdf s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfsf] ;fd~h:ok"0f{
b'O b]zfGt/ /]vfx¿nfO{ sf6\5 . oL æb'O{ b]zfGt/x?Æ jf:tjdf b'O{ ;fgf j[Q
dfq} x'g\ . t/ ;e]{Ifsx?sf] ;fdfGo sNkgfsf] nflu b'O{ ;fgf j[Qsf] ;§f
æb]zfGt/Æ k|of]u ePsf] 5 . xf]lzof/;fy cg'dfk v08 5fg]/ xfdLn] nDafO{
ljs[ltsf] jf:tljs dfgnfO{ 36fpg ;S5f}+ . o; k|sf/n] ^° b]zfGt/sf]
e"sl6jGwx¿sf] nflu cGt/f{li6«o tj/n] s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfdf )=(((^
cg'dfk v08 5flgPsf] lyof] . ta nDafO{ ljs[lt o; k|sf/ 5 M
-s_ s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfdf ! ls=ld=
b"/L df – )=$) ld=
-v_ e"sl6jGwsf] 5]pdf ! ls=ld=sf]
b'/Ldf + )=^* ld -cyf{t\
s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfsf] #° k"j{ /
klZrd_
-u_ s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfsf] !°$(Ú
klZrd / k"jd{ f ))=) ld= –
lrq $ oxflg/ /Den] k[YjLnfO{ :kz{
u5{ .

21
Similarly the scale factor 0.9999 at the central meridian was adopted
for the zones of 3° of longitude. Then the length distortion is as
follows :
a) - 0.10 metres for the distance
of 1 kilometer in the central
meridian
b) + 0.18 metres for the distance of
1 kilometre at the edges of the
zone (that is 1° 30' west and
east of the central meridian)
c) 0.00 metres at 0° 55' west and
east of the central meridian-
here the cylinder cuts the earth.
These values of the length distortion
fig. 5 are computed for the standard
latitude of Nepal.

2.21 Coordinate system

The origin for X coordinates is the
equator where the X axis is put.
The origin for Y coordinates is the
central meridian where the Y axis
is put. Just to avoid having plus
and minus Y coordinates, the false
Easting of 500,000.00 metres for
the central meridian was chosen.
In such way both coordinates
X and Y have positive (plus)
fig. 6 coordinates only.

2.3 Numbering of small scale maps

Small scale maps are defined as those on the scales from 1:1,000,000
to 1:10,000.

22
o:t} k|sf/n] s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfdf )=(((( cg'dfk v08 #° b]zfGt/ /]vfsf]
e"sl6jGwsf] nflu dflgcfPsf] lyof] . To;kl5 nDjfO{–ljs[lt o; k|sf/ x'G5M
-s_ dWo b]zfGt/ /]vfdf !
ls=ld=sf] b"/Ldf – )=!) ld=
-v_ e"sl6jGwsf] 5]pdf ! ls=ld=
b"/Lsf] nflu + )=!* ld=-cyf{t\
s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfaf6
!°#)Ú klZrd / k"j{_
-u_ s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfsf]
)° %%Ú klZrd / k"jd{ f
)=)) ld= – oxfFg/]
lrq % /Den] k[YjLnfO{ :kz{ k5{ .
nDafO{ – ljs[ltsf oL dfgx?
g]kfnsf] k|dfl0fs cIff+zsf] nflu
;+u0fgf ul/Psf x'G5g\ .

@=@! lgofds k|0ffln

X lgofdssf] d"n ljGb" e"–dWo
/]vfdf k5{ h;nfO{ X cIf dflgPsf]
5 . Y lgofdssf] d"n ljGb" dWo
b]zffGt/ /]vfdf k5{ h;nfO{ Y
cIf dflgPsf] 5 . Y lgofdssf]
wg / C0f -+, —_ x6fpgsf nflu
dfq dWo b]zffGt/ /]vfsf] gSsnL
k"jL{o lgofds %)),)))=)) ld=
r'lgPsf] lyof] . o; k|sf/ b'a} X / Y
lgofdssf] lrGx -+_ wg x'g hfG5 .
lrq ^
@=#= ;fgf] cg'dfksf] dfglrqx?sf] ;+Vof+sg ug]{
!M!,))),))) b]lv !M!),))) ;Ddsf] cg'dfksf] dfgnfO{ ;fgf] cg'dfksf]
dfglrq kl/eflift ul/G5 .

23
As a basis for the numbering of the small scale maps the zones of 6°
of longitude in the UTM projection are used (see paragraph 2.2). In
this way there are 60 zones round the earth. The zones are numbered
starting at longitude 180° West and go anticlockwise through 0° of
longitude (Greenwich meridian) to the longitude 180° East (which
is the same meridian as 180° West). The zone bounded by lines
of longitude 180° W. and 174° W is called zone 1 and its central
meridian is 177°W. The zone from 174°W to 168° W is called zone
2 and its central meridian is 171° W etc, etc. Now the whole earth
was divided into longitudinal zones. With parallels the same thing
was done. The whole earth was divided into 4° wide belts of latitude.
For the northern hemisphere the numbering starts at the latitude 0°
which is the equator and goes northward to latitude 4° N. This belt
is marked by the capital letter " A". The next belt is bounded by the
parallel 4° N and 8° N and it is marked with capital letter "B" etc,
etc. In such a way the total surface of the earth has been divided into
spherical rectangles of 6° width in longitude and 4° width in latitude.
Each such spherical rectangle means an International Map on the
scale 1:1,000,000. For this system the letter designating the belt is
written first and is joined to the number designating the zone by a
hyphen. For example a station in Nepal which has its geographical
coordinates 27° N latitude and 85° E longitude is located on the
International Map G - 45.

fig. 7

24
;fgf] cg'dfksf] dfg lrqx?sf] ;+Vof+sgsf] cfwf/ o"=6L= Pd\= k|nDatf ^°
b]zfGt/sf] e"sl6aGwx?nfO{ k|of]u ul/Psf 5g\ -cg'R5]b @=@ df
x]g'{;_ . o;/L k[YjLel/df hDdf ^) j6f e"sl6aGwx? 5g\ oL e"sl6jGwx?sf]
;+Vof+sg !*)° klZrdsf] b]zfGt/af6 z'? u/L ljk/Lt 3l8jt
lbzfaf6 )° b]zfGt/ -u|LgjLr b]zfGt/_ eO{ !*)° k"j{ b]zfGt/
-h'g ls z'? ul/Ps} b]zfGt/ xf]_ ;Dd hfG5 . b]zfGt/x? !*)° k=
/ !&$° k= leq k/]sf] e"sl6aGwnfO{ e"sl6aGw ! elgG5 / o;sf]
s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ !&&° k= x'G5 . b]zfGt/x? !&$° k= b]lv !^*° k= leq k/]sf
If]qnfO{ e"sl6aGw @ elgG5 / o;sf] s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ !&!° k= x'G5 OToflb .
o;/L k"/} k[YjLnfO{ b]zfGt/Lo e"sl6aGwx?df ljeflht ul/Psf] 5 . k"/}
k[YjLnfO{ $° cIff+zsf] km/flsnf] sl6jGwx?df ljeflht ul/Psf] 5 . pQ/Lo
cw{–uf]nfw{sf] lgldQ )° cIff+z -e"dWo /]vf_ af6 ;+Vof+sg z'? ul/G5
/ $° pQ/lt/ a9b} hfG5 . of] sl6jGwnfO{ 7"nf] cIf/ æAÆ n] c+lst
ul/G5 . csf]{ sl6aGwsf] cIff+zx? $° pQ/b]lv *° ;DdnfO{ dflgG5 /
o;nfO{ 7"nf] cIf/ æBÆ n] c+lst ul/G5 OToflb . o;/L g} k[YjLsf] ;a} ;txnfO{
^° km/flsnf] b]zfGt/ / $° km/flsnf] cIff+zsf] uf]nfsf/ cfoftdf ljeflht
ul/Psf] 5 . x/]s o:tf uf]nfsf/ cfoftsf] dtnj cg'dfk !M!,))),)))
ePsf] cGt/f{li6«o dfglrq xf] .
o; k|0fnLdf sl6jGwnfO{ lglb{i6 ul/Psf] 7"nf] cIf/ klxnf n]lvG5 / o;
cIf/df e"sl6jGwnfO{ lglb{i6 u/]sf ;+VofnfO{ ;d:t lrGxåf/f hf]8]sf]

lrq &

25
2.31 By dividing a sheet of the International Map on the scale
1:1,000,000 (for instance above mentioned sheet G - 45) the other
maps on the scales up to 1:10,000 are obtained.
2.311 The sheet is divided into 4 maps on the scale 1:500,000. Each
such map covers an area of 3° of longitude and 2° of latitude. These
maps are marked with the capital letters A,B,C,D - while the number
of the International Map should be written in front of it.
G-45

A B

C D
G-45-D

fig. 8

2.312 The sheet is divided into 36 maps on the scale 1:200,000. Each
such map covers an area of 1° of longitude and 0° 40' of latitude.
These maps are numbered with Roman figures from I up to XXXVI
while the number of the International Map should be written in front
of it.
G-45
I II III IV V VI

VII VIII IX X XI XII

XIII XIV XV XVI XVII XVIII

G-45-XVII
XIX XX XXI XXII XXIII XXIV

XXV XXVI XXVII XXVIII XXIX XXX

XXXI XXXII XXXIII XXXIV XXXV XXXVI

fig. 9

26
x'G5 . pbfx/0fsf] lgldQ g]kfndf s'g} cj:yfg h;sf] ef}uf]lns lgofdsx?
cIff+z @&° pQ/ / b]zfGt/ *%° k"j{ 5 eg] o;nfO{ cGt/f{li6«o dfglrq
G –45 df b]vfOPsf] x'G5 .
@=#! !M!,))),))) cg'dfk ePsf] cGt/f{li6«o dfglrqsf] tfpmnfO{
-pbfx/0fsf] nflu dfly pNn]lvt tfpm G-45_ v08 u/]/ c? !M!),)))
cg'dfk ePsf] dfglrqx? agfOG5 .
@=#!! To; tfpmnfO{ !M%)),))) cg'dfk ePsf] rf/ dfglrqx?df ljeflht
ul/G5 . k|To]s o:tf dfglrqx?n] #° sf] b]zfGt/ / @° sf] cfIff+z ePsf]
If]qnfO{ lnG5 . oL dfglrqx? 7'nf] cIf/ A, B, C, D n] c+lst ul/Psf
x'G5g—hals cGt/f{li6«o dfglrqsf] ;+Vof o;sf] cufl8 n]lvPsf] x'g'k5{ .
G-45

A B

C D
G-45-D

lrq *
@=#!@ tfpmnfO{ #^ dfglrqx?, cg'dfk !M@)),))) ePsf]df ljeflht
ul/G5 . o:tf k|To]s dfglrqn] !° b]zfGt/ / )°$)Ú cIff+z ePsf] If]q
G-45
I II III IV V VI
VII VIII IX X XI XII
G-45-XVII
XIII XIV XV XVI XVII XVIII
XIX XX XXI XXII XXIII XXIV
XXV XXVI XXVII XXVIII XXIX XXX
XXXI XXXII XXXIII XXXIV XXXV XXXVI

lrq (

27
2.313 The sheet is divided into 144 maps on the scale 1:100,000.
Each such map covers an area of 0° 30' of longitude and 0° 20' of
latitude. These maps are numbered with Arabic figures form 1 up to
144 while the number of the International Map should be written in
front of it.
G-45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 G-45-24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84
85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132
133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144

fig. 10
2.32 The sheet of the map on the scale 1:100,000 (see paragraph
2.313) is divided into 4 maps on the scale 1:50,000. Each such map
covers an area of 0°15' of longitude and 0°10' of latitude. These
maps are marked with the capital letters A,B,C,D, - while the number
of the map on the scale 1:100,000 should be written in front of it.
G-45-24

A B

G-45-24-D
C D

fig. 11

2.33 The sheet of the map on the scale 1:50,000 is divided into
4 maps on the scale 1:25,000. Each such map covers an area of
0°07'30" of longitude and 0° 05'00" of latitude. These maps are

28
lnG5 . oL dfglrqx? /f]dg c+sdf I b]lv XXXVI ;Dd ;+Vof+sg ul/G5
hals cGt/f{li6«o dfglrqsf] c+s o;sf] cufl8 n]lvg'k5{ .
@=#!# of] tfpm cg'dfk !M!)),))) sf] !$$ yfg dfglrqx?df ljeflht
ul/G5 . x/]s o:tf] dfglrqn] )° #)Ú sf] b]zfGt/ / )° @)Ú sf] cIff+zleqsf
If]q lnG5 . oL dfglrqx? 1 b]lv 144 ;Dd c/]las lnlkdf ;+Vof+sg ul/Psf]
x'G5 hals cGt/f{li6«o dfglrqsf] ;+Vof o;sf] cufl8 n]Vg'k5{ .
G-45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 G-45-24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84
85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132
133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144

lrq !)
@=#@ cg'dfk !M!)),))) df tof/ u/]sf] of] dfglrqsf] tfpm -cg'R5]b @=#!#
df x]g'{;\_ cg'dfk !M%),))) sf] hDdf $ j6f dfglrqx?df ljeflht ul/G5 .
x/]s o:tf] dfglrqn] )° !%Ú sf] b]zffGt/ / )° !)Ú sf] cIff+zaf6 ag]sf If]q
9fs]sf] x'G5 . oL gS;fx? 7"nf] c+u|]hL cIf/ A,B,C,D n] c+lst ul/Psf x'G5g\–
hals !M!)),))) cg'dfksf] dfglrqsf] ;+Vof o;sf] cufl8 n]Vg' k5{ .
G-45-24

A B

C D G-45-24-D

lrq !!
@=## !M%),))) cg'dfksf] dfglrqsf] tfpmnfO{ !M@%,))) cg'dfksf] $
j6f dfglrqx?df ljeflht ul/G5 . x/]s o:tf] dfglrqsf] )° )&Ú #)Æ
29
marked with small letters a,b,c,d, - while the number of the map on
the scale 1:50,000 should be written in front of it.
G-45-24-D
G-45-24-D-b
a b

c d

fig. 12
2.34 The sheet of the map on the scale 1:25,000 is divided into
4 maps on the scale 1:10,000. Each such map covers an area of
0°03'45" of longitude and 0°02'30" of latitude. These maps are
numbered with Arabic figures 1,2,3,4, - while the number of the map
on the scale 1:25,000 should be written in front of it.
G-45-24-D-b

1 2

G-45-24-D-b-4
3 4

fig. 13

Since its establishment of the Topographical Survey Branch HMG

has abandoned the idea of following the international nomenclature
of small scale maps and has developed the national nomenclature
instead, which is as follows:

2.35 The maps on the scale 1:500,000 are compiled according to

the 3º zones and are numbered as 44.0, 44.5, 45.0.

30
sf] b]zfGt/ / )° )%Ú ))Æ sf] cIff+zleqsf If]q 9fs]sf] x'G5 . oL
dfglrqx?nfO{ ;fgf c+u|]hL cIf/ a, b, c, d n] c+lst u/]sf] x'G5 – hals
!M%),))) cg'dfksf] dfglrqsf] ;+Vof o;sf] cufl8 n]Vg'k5{ .
G-45-24-D
G-45-24-D-b
a b

c d

lrq !@
@=#$ !M@%,))) cg'dfksf] dfglrqsf] tfpmnfO{ $ j6f !M!),)))
cg'dfksf] dfglrqdf ljeflht ul/G5 . x/]s o:tf] dfglrqn] )° )#Ú
$%Æ sf] b]zfGt/ / )° )@Ú #)Æ sf] cIf+zdf k/]sf] If]q 9fs]sf] x'G5 .
oL dfglrqx? c/]ljs lnlk 1,2,3,4 OToflbn] c+lst u/]sf] x'G5 — hals
!M@%,))) cg'dfkdf tof/ u/]sf] dfglrqsf] ;+Vof o;sf] cufl8 n]Vg'k5{ .
G-45-24-D-b

1 2

G-45-24-D-b-4
3 4

lrq !#

:yn?k gfkL dxfzfvfsf] :yfkgf kZrft >L % sf] ;/sf/n] ;fgf] dfgsf]
gS;fsf] cGt/f{li6«o gfdf+sg ug]{ ;f]rnfO{ 5f8L o;sf] ;§fdf /fli6«o
gfdf+sgsf] ljsf; u/]sf] 5 h'g tn n]lvP cg';f/ 5 M
@=#% cg'dfk !M%)),))) sf] dfglrqx? #º e"–sl6aGwsf] cfwf/df tof/
ul/G5 / $$=), $$=%, $%=) eg]/ ;+Vof+sg ul/G5g\ .

31
2.36 The sheets of the map on the scale 1:250,000 are obtained
by dividing each 3º zone by 150 km east and west from the central
meridians and by 150 km in south - north direction. In each zone
there are 8 sheets of the map on the scale 1:250,000. Each such map
covers an area of 150 km × 150 km. These maps are numbred with
figures 1 - 8, - while the number of the map on the scale 1:500,000
should be written in front of it, eg. 44.0 - 3.

2.37 The sheet of the map on the scale 1:250,000 is divided into 4
maps on the scale 1:125,000. Each such map covers an area of 75
km × 75 km. These maps are numbered with figures 1 - 4, - while the
number of the map on the scale 1:250,000 should be written in front
of it, e.g. 44.0 - 3 - 1.

2.38 The sheets of the map on the scale 1:100,000 are numbered as
described in paragraph 2.4, using numbers from 001 to 180. Each
such map covers an area of 50 km × 50 km.

2.39 Numbering of medium scale maps.

These maps are the maps on the scales of 1:25,000 and 1:50,000.

2.391 The sheet of the map on the scale 1:100,000 is divided into
4 maps on the scale 1:50,000. Each such map covers an area of 25
km × 25 km. These maps are numbered with figures 1 - 4, - while the
number of the map on the scale 1:100,000 should be written in front
of it, e.g. 101 - 2.

2.392 The sheet of the map on the scale 1:100,000 is divided into 16
maps on the scale 1:25,000. Each such map covers an area of 12.5
km × 12.5 km. These maps are numbered 01-16, - while the number
of the map on the scale 1:100,000 should be written in front of it,
e.g. 101 - 02.

32
@=#^ cg'dfk !M@%),))) df dfglrq tfpx? #) e"–sl6aGwnfO{ s]lGb|o
b]zfGt/ /]vfaf6 !%) ls=ld= k"j{ – klZrd / !%) ls=ld= blIf0f–pQ/ lbzfdf
ljeflht ul/ k|fKt x'G5g\ . k|To]s e"–sl6aGwdf !M@%),))) cg'dfksf
* tfp /xG5g\ . o:tf k|To]s gS;fn] !%) ls=ld= × !%) ls=ld=sf]
If]qkmn lnG5 . tL dfglrqx? c+s !–* n] ;+Vof+sg ul/G5g\ ha ls cg'dfk
!M%)),))) sf] dfglrq gDa/ o; cuf8L n]lvPsf] x'g'k5{ . pbfx/0fsf]
nfluM $$=)–# .
@=#& !M@%),))) cg'dfksf] dfglrqsf] tfpnfO{ !M!@%,))) cg'dfksf] $
j6f dfglrqdf ljeflht ul/G5 . x/]s o:tf] dfglrqn] &% ls=ld= × &%
ls=ld=sf] If]q 9fs]sf] x'G5 . oL dfglrqx? !–$ c+sn] ;+Vof+sg ul/Psf] x'G5 .
ha ls !M@%),))) cg'dfksf] dfglrqsf] ;+Vof o;sf] cuf8L n]Vg'k5{ .
pbfx/0fsf] nfluM $$=)–#–! .
@=#* cg'dfk !M!)),))) sf] dfglrqsf] ;+Vof+sg cg'R5]b @=$ df j0f{g
ul/P cg';f/ g} ))! b]lv !*) ;Dd ul/G5 . o:tf x]/s dfglrqn] %)
ls=ld= × %) ls=ld=sf] If]q 9fs]sf] x'G5 .
@=#( dWod cg'dfksf dfglrqx?sf] ;+Vof+sg
oL dfglrqx? cg'dfk !M@%,))) / !M%),))) sf x'g\ .
@=#(! cg'dfk !M!)),))) sf] dfglrqnfO{ cg'dfk !M%),))) sf] $ j6f
dfglrqdf ljeflht ul/G5 . o:tf] x/]sf dfglrqn] @% ls=ld= × @%
ls=ld=sf] If]q 9fS5 . oL dfglrqx? !–$ c+sn] ;+Vof+sg ul/Psf x'G5g\ .
hals cg'dfk !M!)),))) sf] dfglrqsf] gDa/ o;sf] cuf8L n]Vg'k5{ .
pbfx/0fsf] nfluM !)!–@ .
@=#(@ cg'dfk !M!)),))) sf] dfglrqnfO{ !^ efudf ljeflht ul/
!M@%,))) cg'dfksf] dfglrq agfO{G5 . o:tf] x/]s dfglrqn] !@=% ls=ld=
× !@=% ls=ld=sf] If]q 9fS5 . oL dfglrqx? )!–!^ c+sn] ;+Vof+sg ul/Psf
x'G5g\ . hals !M!)),))) dfgsf] dfglrqsf] gDa/ o;sf] cuf8L n]Vg'k5{ .
pbfx/0fsf] nfluM !)!–)@ .

33
 2.393 Sheet Layout and Numbering for Topographic Maps at Scales
1:25,000 and 1:50,000
The area covered by longitudes 80° E and 89° E and latitudes 26°
N and 31° N is divided into quadrilaterals of size 1° in east and 1°
in north. Each quadrilateral is assigned a number. For example,
2785. The first two digits represent the latitude and last two digits
represent the longitude of the lower left corner of corresponding 1° by
1° quadrilateral.

pographic Maps at Scales 1:25,000 and 1:50,000

80° E.
nd 31°
ize 1°
Each
. For
digits
digits
er left
y 1°
By dividing each 1° by 1° quadrilateral, maps on the scales 1:25,000
and 1:50,000 are obtained.
eral, maps on the scales 1:25,000 and 1:50,000 are

000: 2.3931 Topographic map at scale 1:50,000:

adrilateral
laterals of 2785 2785 01
01 02 03 04
05 06 07 08 The area covered by a 1° by
each small 09 10 11 12 1° quadrilateral is divided into
1:50,000.
nding to a
13 14 15 16 sixteen equal quadrilaterals of
1 – 16 as 1:50 000 size 15' in east and 15' in north.
number is
l quadrilateral prefixed by the number of the
. For example, 2785 01.

000:
34
t at scale
ur equal 2785 01 2785 01A
and 7' 30"
A B
 @=#(# !M@%,))) / !M%),))) cg'dfksf :yn?k dfglrqx?sf] cleGof; /
;+Vof+sg
b]zfGt/x? *)) k"= / *() k"= tyf cIff+zx? @^) p= / #!) p= larsf]
If]qnfO{ !) k"= × !) p= km/flsnf] cfoftdf ljeflht ul/Psf] 5 . x/]s
o:tf cfoftnfO{ Pp6f ;+Vofn] lglb{i6 ul/Psf] x'G5 . pbfx/0fsf] lgldQ
@&*% . klxnf] b'O{ c+s / kl5Nnf] b'O{ c+sn] qmdzM ;Da4 !) × !)
km/flsnf] cfoftsf] b]a]| tkm{sf] tNnf] s'gfsf] cIff+z / b]zfGt/nfO{ hgfpFb5 .

opographic Maps at Scales 1:25,000 and 1:50,000

80° E.
nd 31°
size 1°
Each
r. For
digits
o digits
wer left
by 1°
x/]s o:tf !) × !) km/flsnf] cfoftnfO{ ljefhg u/L !M@%,))) / !M%),)))
cg'dfksf dfglrqx? agfOG5g\ .
teral, maps on the scales 1:25,000 and 1:50,000 are

000: @=#(#! !M%),))) cg'dfksf] :yn?k dfglrq

uadrilateral
2785 2785 01
!) × !) km/flsnf] Pp6f cfoftsf]
rilaterals of
01 02 03 04 If]qnfO{ !%Ú k"\= × !%Ú p= km/flsnf
05 06 07 08
each small
;f]x| a/fa/ cfoftx?df ljeflht
09 10 11 12
1:50,000. ul/G5 .
13 14 15 16
onding to a
1 – 16 as 1:50 000
number is
all quadrilateral prefixed by the number of the
al. For example, 2785 01.

000: 35
et at scale
our equal 2785 01 2785 01A
and 7' 30"
A B
000:

uadrilateral
rilaterals of 2785 2785 01
The ground area corresponding to each small quadrilateral is
01 02 03 04
05 06 07 08
each small mapped at scale 1:50,000. Each small quadrilateral (corresponding
09 10 11 12
1:50,000. to a map sheet) is given a number 01 – 16 as shown in figure. The
13 14 15 16
onding to a
1 – 16 as map sheet number is written1:50 000 as the number of small quadrilateral
number is prefixed by the number of the corresponding 1° by 1° quadrilateral.
all quadrilateral prefixed by the number of the
For 2785
al. For example, example,
01. 2785 01.

000: 2.3932 Topographic map at scale 1:25,000:

et at scale
our equal 2785 01 2785 01A The area covered by a map sheet
and 7' 30"
A B at scale 1:50,000 is divided into
four equal quadrilaterals of
g to each C D size 7' 30" in east and 7' 30" in
f 1:25,000.
to a map 1:50 000 1:25 000 north.
The map
onding alphabet prefixed by the map sheet number of
50,000. For example, 2785 01A.
The ground area corresponding to each quadrilateral is mapped at
scale of 1:25,000. Each quadrilateral (corresponding to a map sheet)
is given an alphabet A - D. The map sheet number is written as
corresponding alphabet prefixed by the map sheet number of the
corresponding map at scale 1:50,000. For example, 2785 01A.
2.4 Numbering of large scale plans (maps)
Large scale plans (maps) are defined as those on scales from 1:2,500
to 1:500.
As already explained in paragraph 2.2 the wider the zone the bigger
is the length distortion. This means that the difference between the
actual distance on the earth's surface and the distance on the plan
(map) increases. This length distortion does not matter too much for
small scale maps but for large scale plans (maps) it does.
A high degree of accuracy is needed. Therefore the zones for large
scale plans (maps) are made narrower, just 3° wide for longitude. In
such a way there are 120 zones around the world. The numbering
starts again at longitude180°W and goes anticlockwise. But this time
the longitude 180°W is the central meridian of 3° Zone called Zone
0.5. This Zone 0.5 is bounded by lines of longitude178°30'E and

36
000:

uadrilateral
rilaterals of 2785 2785 01
01 02 03 04
x/]s
05 o:tf ;fgf cfoftx?;+u ;+a4 hldgsf] If]qnfO{ !M%),))) cg'dfkgdf
06 07 08
each small 09 10 11 12
1:50,000. gS;f+sg ul/G5 . x/]s o:tf ;fgf cfoftx? -k|To]s dfglrqsf] tfp;+u ;+a4_
13 14 15 16
onding to a
1 – 16 as
nfO{ lrqdf b]vfP h:t} )!–!^ ;Dd ;+Vof+sg ul/G5 . of] dfglrqsf] ;+Vof+sg
1:50 000
number is ubf{ klxn] ;DalGwt !) × !) km/flsnf] cfoftsf] ;+Vof / To;kl5 pQm ;fgf
all quadrilateral prefixed by the number of the
cfoftsf]
al. For example, ;+Vof n]lvPsf] x'gk' b{5 . pbfx/0fsf] nfluM @*&% )! .
2785 01.

000:
@=#(#@ !M@%,))) cg'dfksf] :yn?k dfglrq
et at scale !M%),))) cg'dfksf] dfglrqsf]
our equal 2785 01 2785 01A
and 7' 30"
A B
tfpn] 9fs]sf] If]qnfO{ &Ú #)Æ
k"j{ × &Ú #)Æ pQ/ km/flsnf]
g to each C D rf/ a/fa/ cfoftx?df ljeflht
f 1:25,000.
to a map 1:50 000 1:25 000 ul/G5 .
The map
onding alphabet prefixed by the map sheet number of
x/]s o:tf
50,000. For example, 2785cfoftx?;+
01A. u ;Da4 hldgsf] If]qnfO{ !M@%,))) cg'dfkgdf
gS;f+sg ul/G5 . x/]s o:tf cfoftx? -k|To]s dfglrqsf] tfp;+u ;Da4_
nfO{ c+u|]hL cIf/ A - D ;Dd gfdf+sg ul/G5 . of] dfglrqsf] ;+Vofsg
ubf{ klxn] !M%),))) cg'dfksf] ;DalGwt dfglrqsf] ;+Vof / To;kl5 pQm
cfoftsf] cIf/ n]lvPsf] x'g'kb{5 . pbfx/0fsf] nfluM @&*% )!A .
@=$ 7"nf] cg'dfksf] gS;fx?sf] ;+Vofsg ug]{
cg'dfk !M@,%)) b]lv !M%)) ;Dddf tof/ ul/Psf gS;fx?nfO{ 7"nf]
cg'dfksf] gS;f egL kl/eflift u/]sf 5g\ .
cg'R5]b @=@ df JofVof u/]sf] e"sl6aGw km/flsnf] eof] eg] nDafO{df ljs[lt
7"nf] x'G5 . o;sf] dtnj k[YjLsf] ;txdf ePsf] vf; b"/L / gS;fdf ePsf] of]
b"/Lsf] km/s a9]/ hfG5 . ;fgf] cg'dfksf] dfglrqx?sf] lgldQ oL nDafO{df
ljs[lt Toltsf] dxTj x'Fb}g hlt 7"nf] cg'dfkdf x'G5 . pRrtd z'4tf cfjZos
kb{5 . o;sf/0f 7"nf] cg'dfksf] gS;fsf] lgldQ e"sl6aGwx? #° b]zfGt/sf]
sfod u/L ;f+u'/f] agfOPsf 5g\ . o;/L ;+;f/el/ hDdf !@) e"sl6aGwx?
x'G5g\ . ;+Vof+sg km]l/ b]zfGt/ !*)° k= af6 g} z'? x'G5 / ljk/Lt 3l8jtsf]
lbzf eP/ hfG5 . t/ b]zfGt/ !*)° k=g}= #° e"sl6aGwsf] dWo b]zfGt/ x'G5 .
h;nfO{ e"sl6aGw g+ )=% eGb5 of] e"sl6aGw !&*° #)Ú k"= / !&*° #)Ú k=
sf] b]zfGt/x?n] 3]l/Psf x'G5g\ . csf]{ #° sf] e"sl6aGwnfO{ e"sl6aGw g+=!=)
37
178°30'W. The next 3° zone is called Zone 1.0 and is bounded by
lines of longitude 178°30'W and 175°30'W with its central meridian
177°W. For example the station in Nepal with its longitude 85°E is
located in the Zone 44.5. There are three 3° zones used for Nepal.
They are numbered as Zones 44.0, 44.5, 45.0 and their central
meridians are 81°E, 84°E, 87°E respectively. For the easy handling
and better understanding of the users of the large scale plans (maps)
the special grid system for Nepal was developed. Each 3° zone is
divided into grid squares 50 km × 50 km, a so called grid sheet. Fifty
kilometres is approximately equivalent to 30' in longitude as well as
in latitude. To get uniform numbering the X coordinates of all three
zones run north from 2,900 km to 3,400 km (measured from the
equator where X = 0), forming 10 belts.

fig. 14

The division in the Y coordinates always starts from the central

meridian (with the false Easting Y = 500,000.00 metres) - see fig. 6.
Each zone is a little less than 300 km wide. This means that from the
central meridian a belt extends about 150 km to the West and to the
East so that we get three squares on each side of the central meridian
of each belt of one zone. In that way 60 grid sheets are in each zone

38
eGb5 / of] !&*° #)Ú k= / !&%° #)Ú k= sf] b]zfGt/x?n] 3]l/Psf] x'G5 .
of] e"sl6aGwsf] dWo b]zfGt/ !&&° k=sf] b]zfGt/ x'G5 . pbx/0fsf] lgldQ
g]kfndf b]zfGt/ *%° k"= ePsf] s'g} cj:yfgnfO{ e"sl6aGw g+= $$=% df
b]vfPsf] x'G5 . tLg j6f #° e"sl6aGwx? g]kfnsf] nflu k|of]udf NofOPsf
5g\ . tL e"sl6aGwx? $$=),$$=% / $%=) n] ;+Vof+sg ul/Psf 5g\ . oL
e"sl6aGwx?sf] dWo b]zfGt/x? qmdzM *!° k"=, *$° k"= / *&° k"= x'g\ . 7"nf]
cg'dfksf gS;fx?sf] k|of]u ug]{x?nfO{ /fd|f];+u a'em\g ;lsg] tyf ;lhnf];+u
k|of]udf Nofpg x'g] u/L g]kfnsf] nflu ljz]if lu|8 k|0ffnL ;[hgf ul/Psf]
5 . x/]s #º e"sl6aGwx?nfO{ %) ls=ld= × %) ls=ld= juf{sf/ lu|8df

lrq !$

ljeflht u/]sf] 5 h;nfO{ lu|8 tfpm elgG5 . %) ls=ld= em08} #)Ú b]zfGt/
tyf #)Ú cIff+zsf] a/fa/ cfpF5 . Ps} lsl;dsf] ;+Vof+sg ug{ ltg} e"sl6aGwx?sf]
lgofdsx? -e"dWo /]vf hxfF x = ) x'G5_ b]lv hDdf !) sl6aGw agfO{
@()) ls=ld= b]lv #$)) ls=ld= ;Dd km}lnPsf] 5 . ;+w} lgofdsx?sf] ljefhg
s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vf -gSsnL k"jL{o lgofds Y = %)),)))=)) ld= nfO{ lnP/_
af6 z'? x'G5 lrq ^ x]g'{; . k|To]s e"sl6aGwsf] rf}8fO{ #)) ls=ld eGbf s]xL
sd x'G5 . To;sf] dtnj Pp6f sl6aGw s]Gb|Lo b]zfGt/ /]vfaf6 s/La !%)
39
and 180 grid sheets for Nepal in total. The numbering starts from the
north-western corner with the number 001 and ends in the south -
eastern corner of the first zone with 060. The second zone starts with
061 and ends with 120 and the numbering of the third zone starts
from 121 and ends with 180.

2.41 Each grid sheet (50 km × 50 km) is further divided into 1600
smaller squares (40 belts and 40 columns) which means that each
small square covers an area of 1,250 m × 1,250m. These are drawn
on the plastic sheet (which is used for the cadastral map) at a scale of
1:2,500 and give the frame of the plan (map) as 50 cm × 50 cm. The
plans (maps) are numbered from the north-western corner of the grid
sheet with the number 0001 and run to the south-eastern corner with
the number 1600. The number of the grid sheet should be written in
front of it.

fig. 15

40
ls=ld= klZrd / k"j{lt/ km}lnG5 tfls Ps e"sl6aGwsf] k|To]s sl6aGwdf s]Gb|Lo
b]zfGt/ /]vfsf] k|To]s e"hfdf tLg j6f ju{x? kfpF5f}+ . To; k|sf/ k|To]s
e"sl6aGwleq ^) j6f lu|8 tfpmx? x'G5g\ / hDdf g]kfndf !*) lu|8
tfpmx? x'G5g\ . pQ/ klZrd s'gfaf6 ;+Vof ))! nfO{ lnP/ ;+Vof+sg
z'? x'G5 / klxnf] e"sl6aGwdf )^) sf] ;fy} blIf0fL k"j{df vtd x'G5 .
bf];|f] e"sl6aGwdf )^! n] z'? x'G5 / !@) ;Dd uP/ vtd x'G5 / t];|f]
e"sl6aGwsf] ;+Vof+sg !@! af6 z'? x'G5 / !*) sf] ;fy vtd x'G5 .
@=$! k|To]s lu|8 tfpm -%) ls=ld= × %) ls=ld=_ km]l/ !^)) ;fgf] ju{x?
-$) sl6aGwx? / $) dxnx?_ df efu nufOPsf] x'G5 h;sf] dtnj k|To]s
;fgf] ju{n] !,@%) ld=× !,@%) ld= sf] If]qkmn 9fS5 . logLx? !M@,%)) sf]
cg'dfkdf Knfli6s tfpmdf lvlrG5 -h'g lsQf gS;fsf] nflu k|of]u ul/G5_
/ logLx?n] %) ;]=ld= × %) ;]=ld= gS;fsf] lsgf/f lbG5 . tL gS;fx?
;+Vof )))! sf] ;lxt lu|8 tfpmsf] pQ/L klZrd s'gfaf6 ;+Vof+sg ul/G5
/ ;+Vof !^)) ;lxt blIf0f k"j{ s'gf;Dd k'U5 . lu|8 tfpmsf] ;+Vof o;sf]
cufl8kl§ n]Vg'k5{ .

lrq !%

41
2.411 Each grid sheet or map on the scale 1:100,000 (covering an area of
50 km X 50 km) is divided into 100 plans (maps) on the scale 1:10,000.
Each such plan (map) covers an area of 5 km X 5 km. These plans (maps)
are numbered with figure 001 – 100, - while the number of the map on the
scale 1:100,000 should be written in front of it, e.g. 101 - 044.

2.412 The plan (map) on the scale 1:10,000 is divided into 4 plans (maps)
on the scale 1:5,000. Each such plan (map) covers an area of 2.5 km ×2.5
km. These plans (maps) are numbered with figures 1- 4, - while the number
of the plan (map) on the scale 1:10,000 should be written in front of it, e.g.
101- 044 - 2.

2.413 The plan (map) on the scale 1:10,000 is divided into 100 plans
(maps) on the scale 1:1,000. Each such plan (map) covers an area of 500
m×500m. These plans (maps) are numbered with figures 001-100, while
the number of the plan (map) on the scale 1:10,000 should be written in
front of it, e.g. 101 - 044 - 019.

2.42 Dividing a plan (map) on the scale 1:2,500 the other plans
(maps) on the scales 1:1,250 and 1:500 are obtained.

2.421 The plan (map) on the scale 1:2,500 is divided into 4 plans
(maps) on the scale 1:1,250. Each such plan (map) covers an area of
625m × 625m. The plans (maps) are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4 -while the
number of the plan (map) on the scale 1:2,500 should be written in
front of it.
!)!–)^##

! @

# $ !)!–)^##–$

fig. 16

42
@=$!! !M!)),))) cg'dfk ePsf k|To]s lu|8 tfp cyjf dfglrq -%) ls=
ld= × %) ls=ld= sf] If]qkmn 9fSg]_ nfO{ cg'dfk !M!),))) sf !)) j6f
gS;fx?df ljefhg ul/G5 . k|To]s o:tf] gS;fn] % ls=ld= × % ls=ld=
sf] If]qkmn 9fS5 . tL gS;fx? ))!–!)) n] ;+Vof+sg ul/G5–hals
cg'dfk !M!)),))) sf] gS;fsf] ;+Vof o;sf] cufl8 kl§ n]Vg' k5{ .
pbfx/0fsf] nflu M !)!–)$$ .
@=$!@ cg'dfk !M!),))) sf] gS;f cg'dfk !M%,))) sf $ j6f gS;fx?df
ljefhg ul/G5 . k|To]s o:tf] gS;fn] @=% ls=ld= × @=% ls=ld= sf] If]qkmn
9fS5 . tL gS;fx? !–$ n] ;+Vof+sg ul/G5 – hals cg'dfk !M!),))) sf]
gS;fsf] ;+Vof o;sf] cufl8kl§ n]Vg'k5{ . pbfx/0fsf] nflu M !)!–)$$–@ .
@=$!# cg'dfk !M!),))) sf] gS;f cg'dfk !M!,))) sf !)) j6f
gS;fx?df ljefhg ul/G5 . k|To]s o:tf] gS;fn] %)) ld= × %)) ld=
sf] If]qkmn 9fS5 . tL gS;fx? ))!–!)) n] ;+Vof+sg ul/G5–hjls
cg'dfk !M!),))) df gS;fsf] ;+Vof o;sf] cufl8 kl§ n]Vg'k5{ .
pbfx/0fsf] nflu M !)!–)$$–)!( .
@=$@ cg'dfk !M@,%)) sf] gS;fnfO{ ljeflht u/]/ cg'dfk !M!,@%) /
!M%)) sf] c? gS;fx? lgsflnG5g .
@=$@! cg'dfk !M@,%)) sf] gS;f rf/j6f cg'dfk !M!,@%) sf gS;fx?df
ljeflht ul/G5 . k|To]s o:tf] gS;fn] ^@% ld= × ^@% ld=sf] If]qkmn 9fS5 .
tL gS;fx? !,@,#,$, n] ;+Vof+sg ul/G5 hals cg'dfk !M@,%)) sf] gS;fsf]
;+Vof o;sf] cufl8kl§ n]lvg'k5{ .
!)!–)^##

! @

# $ !)!–)^##–$

lrq !^
43
2.422 The plan (map) on the scale 1:2,500 is divided into 25 plans
(maps) on the scale 1:500. Each such plan (map) covers an area of
250m × 250m. The plans (maps) are numbered from 01 to 25-while
the number of the plan (map) on the scale 1:2,500 should be written
in front of it.

!)!–)^##
)! )@ )# )$ )%
)^ )& )* )( !)
!! !@ !# !$ !% !)!–)^##–!$

!^ !& !* !( @)

@! @@ @# @$ @%

fig. 17
2.5 Numbering of the trigonometrical stations in Nepal
There are six kinds of trigonometrical stations in Nepal : basic first,
first, second, third and fourth order trigonometrical stations and
temporary trigonometrical stations. The following numbers are used
for them :
Order
Basic first names only*
First 1-9
Second 10 -99
Third 100 - 999
Fourth 1000 - 9999
Temporary 10000 - 99999.

*Note : The basic first order trigonometrical stations are used as a

trigonometrical framework for the first order trigonometrical
stations and also as a trigonometrical framework for the
second, third and fourth order trigonometrical stations. As
such they must also have a number. At present they all have
a number as a first or second order trigonometrical station.

44
@=$@@ !M@,%)) cg'kfk ePsf] dfglrqnfO{ !M%)) cg'dfk ePsf] c? @%
j6f gS;fx?df ljeflht ul/G5 . o:tf k|To]s gS;fn] @%) ld= × @%) ld=
If]qkmn 9fS5 . gS;fx? )! b]lv @% ;Dd ;+Vof+sg ul/G5 – hals cg'dfk
!M@,%)) ePsf] dfglrqsf] ;+Vof o;sf] cufl8kl§ n]lvg'kb{5 .
!)!–)^##
)! )@ )# )$ )%
)^ )& )* )( !)
!! !@ !# !$ !% !)!–)^##–!$

!^ !& !* !( @)

@! @@ @# @$ @%

lrq !&

@=% g]kfndf lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?sf] ;+Vof+sg

g]kfndf ^ k|sf/sdf lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx? 5g\M cfwf/e"t k|yd,k|yd
bhf{, bf];|f] bhf{, t[tLo bhf{ / rf}yf] bhf{sf lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfg / c:yfoL
lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx? . ltgLx?sf] nflu lgDg lnlvt c+s k|of]udf NofOG5 M
bhf{
cfwf/e"t k|yd gfd dfq*
k|yd !—(
bf];|f] !) — ((
t];|f] !)) — (((
rf}yf] !))) — ((((
c:yfoL !)))) — (((((=

* l6Kk0fL M cfwf/e"t k|yd bhf{ lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx? k|yd bhf{sf]

lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?sf] cfwf/e"t /rgf h:t} k|of]u ul/G5
/ ;fy} bf];|f], t];|f] tyf rf}yf] bhf{sf] lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?sf]
cfw/ /rgfnfO{ klg . o;/L logLx?sf] klg ;+Vof x'g'k5{ . xfn
logLx?nfO{ k|yd cyjf bf];|f] bhf{sf] lqsf]0fldlto cj:ygx?s}
45
 For example 13 Hatyal (163). This is the second order
trigonometrical station, but when we use it as a basic first order
trigonometrical station we prefer to speak about "Hatyal"
only, without mentioning its number and grid sheet.
This is possible as there are only few tens of basic first
order trigonometrical stations in Nepal and each of them
has different name.
From the number of the figures in the number of a station we can
recognize its order. Thus one figure means a first order station, two
figures a second order station etc, etc. This system of numbering
of the trigonometrical stations is used for each grid sheet (50km ×
50km). That means that every station in addition to its particular
number and its name also has the number of the grid sheet in which
the station is located. For instance a first order trigonometrical station
first in the grid sheet 102 has its designation as follows :
1 Nalipani (102)
or in brief :
1/102.

46
 ;+Vof /flvPsf] 5 . pbfx/0fsf] lgldQ !# xl6ofn -!^#_ .
of] bf];|f] bhf{sf] lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfg xf], t/ ha o; cj:yfgnfO{
cfwf/e"t k|yd bhf{ lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfg h:t} k|of]u
ul/G5 xfdL o;sf] cj:yfg ;+Vof tyf lu|8 tfpnfO{ Wofgdf
g/fvL vfnL cj:yfgsf] gfpF æxl6ofnÆ n]V5f}+ . g]kfn clw/fHodf
o:tf] k|yd bhf{ lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx? sd dfqfdf dfq x'g]
tyf gfpFx? klg gbf]xl/g] x'Fbf of] k|0ffnL k|of]udf NofP s'g}
cfklQ x'Fb}g .
cj:yfgsf] ;+Vofdf c+ssf] ;+Vof x]/L xfdLn] Tof] cj:yfgsf] bhf{ 5'6Øfpg
;S5f}+ . o; k|sf/ Pp6f dfq c+ssf] dtnj k|yd bhf{, b'O{ c+sx?n] bf];|f]
bhf{ OToflb, OToflb . lqsf]0fldlto cj:yfgx?sf] ;+Vof+sg ug]{ of] k|0fnL
k|To]s lu|8 tfpm -%) ls=ld= × %) ls= ld=_ sf] nfuL k|of]udf NofOPsf] 5 .
To;sf] dtnj k|To]s cj:yfgdf o;}sf] ;+Vof / gfdsf] cltl/Qm of] k/]sf]
lu|8 tfpsf] ;+Vof klg n]lvPsf] x'G5 . pbfx/0fsf] nflu lu|8 tfpm !)@ df
l:yt k|yd bhf{sf] lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgnfO{ tn h:t} lglb{i6 ul/G5 M
! gfnf kfgL -!)@_
cyjf 5f]6s/Ldf M
!÷!)@=

47
3. RECONNAISSANCE

Reconnaissance means looking for and selecting the best position for
trigonometrical stations and deciding on the most suitable method
for fixing them. Careful reconnaissance is essential for any kind
of trigonometrical field work. Done well it saves a lot of time
especially for the observer but also for the computer.
To establish basic first, first, second and third order station, we have
to begin by planning on small scale (topographical) maps. At the
present time there are only three reliable maps available :
– The one inch to Eight Miles Map or 1:506,880, covering
whole Nepal in two sheets (East and West sheet) and the
1:250,000 scale map. Both maps are used for the planning
of basic first and first order stations.
– The One Inch to one Mile Map or 1:63,360. One sheet
covers an area of 15' longitude into 15' latitude. This map is
used for the planning of second and third order stations.
By studying these maps in the office we can sketch out a framework
with the approximate locations of the stations. Then by investigation
in the field we have to decide which framework has to be adopted
(which rays are intervisible etc) and the exact location of each station.
Because of the small scale of these maps it is not possible to prepare
a framework on them for the fourth order stations and so we have
to find the best location directly in the field. For this we have a
diagram on the scale 1:25,000. On this diagram the Headquarters
has plotted the grid squares and all known trigonometrical stations

48
#= k"j]{If0f

k"j]{If0fsf] dtnj lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgsf] lgldQ ;aeGbf /fd|f] l:ylt x]/L

5fGg' xf] / logLx?nfO{ :yfkgf ug{ ;aeGbf pko'Qm t/Lsfsf] lg0f{o ug'{ xf] .
h'g;'s} lqsf]0fldlto If]qLo sfo{sf] lgldQ ;fjwfgk"0f{ k"j]{If0fsf] cTofjZos
5 . k"j]{If0f /fd|f];+u u/]sf] v08df vf; u/]/ ;j]{Ifsx? tyf sDKo'6/x?sf]
klg ;dodf w]/} arfj6 x'G5 .
cfwf/e"t k|yd, k|yd, bf];|f] tyf t];|f] bhf{sf] cj:yfgx? :yfkgf ug{, xfdLn]
;fgf] cg'dfk dfglrq -tn ?k_ df of]hgf agfO{ z'? ug'{k5{ . xfn hDdf
ltg e/kbf]{ dfglrqx? kfOG5g\ M
— clw/fHonfO{ hDdf b'O{ tfpmn] 9fs]sf] -k"jL{o tyf klZrdL_ tfpm !
O~r a/fa/ * dfOnsf] dfglrq cyjf !M%)^,**) / !M@%),)))
cg'dfksf] gS;f . oL b'j} k|sf/sf gS;fx? cfwf/e"t k|yd tyf klxnf
bhf{sf] cj:yfgx?sf] dfglrq of]hgf agfpg k|of]u ul/G5 .
— ! O~r a/fa/ ! dfOnsf] cyf{t !M^#,#^) . dfglrq x/]s Ps
dfglrqsf] tfpmn] !%Ú b]zfGt/ / !%Ú cIff+zsf] If]q 9fs]sf] x'G5 .
of] dfglrq bf];|f] tyf t];|f] bhf{sf] cj:yfgsf] dfglrq of]hgf ug{sf]
lgldQ k|of]u ul/G5 .
xfdLn] clkm;df -sfof{nodf_ oL dfglrqx?sf] cWoogaf6 cj:yfgx?sf]
cfGbfhL l:yltsf] cfwf/ /rgfsf] k|f?k yfxf kfpg ;lsG5 . kl5 sfo{ If]qdf
hf+r u/L xfdLn] s'g rflx+ cfwf/ /rgfnfO{ dfGotf lbg] -s'g /]vfx? cfk;df
b]lvG5 OToflb_ / x/]s cj:yfgsf] l7s l:ylt ;d]t lg0f{o ug{ ;S5f}+ .
oL dfglrqx? ;fgf] cg'dfksf] ePsf]n] o;df rf}yf bhf{sf] cfwf/ /rgf
tof/ ug{ ;lsb}g / o;sf/0f xfdLn] sfo{ If]qdf ;aeGbf /fd|f] l:ylt kQf
nufpg'k5{ . o;sf] lgldQ xfdL;+u !M@%,))) cg'dfksf] /]vflrq 5 .
49
by the coordinatograph. Copies of this diagram are distributed to
the field, where each new station is plotted with the intersection or
resection method by graphical way (see chapter 10). An example of
what such diagram looks like is attached at the end of this book in
the appendix A.
Whenever the observer goes to the field he must always take the
theodolite with him. This is a strict rule for the Trigonometrical Division.
For the reconnaissance work the plane table is of course useful.
There are some conditions which must be known and understood for
selecting the best positions for trigonometrical stations.
3.1 Recommended distance between two closed stations
Basic first order 30 - 65 km
First order 20 - 30 km
Second order 9 - 15 km
Third order 3 - 7 km
Fourth order 0.2 - 2 km
3.2 Cases of determination
3.21 Basic first order stations are determined either by triangulation
or (and) trilateration method (see 3.31) controlled by a number of
astronomical observations.

fig. 18

50
o; /]vf lrqdf lgofds oGqåf/f lu|8 ju{x? tyf ;a} 1ft lqsf]0fldtLo
cj:yfgx? sfof{nod} c+lst ul/G5 . o; /]vf lrqsf] k|ltlnlkx? sfo{ If]qdf
afl8G5g\, h:df x/]s gof+ cj:yfgx? cGt/5]bg / k|ltIf]bg t/Lsf k|of]u
u/L /]vf lrqåf/f c+lst ul/G5 -cWofo !) df x]g'{;\_ . pbfx/0fsf] lgldQ o;
lsl;dsf] /]vflrq s:tf] x'G5 eg] kl/lzi6 A df b]vfOPsf] 5 .
;e]{Ifsn] cfkm\gf] sfo{ If]qdf hfg] j]nf hlxn] klg cfkm\gf] lyof]8f]nfO6
;fyd} lnP/ hfg} k5{ . of] lqsf]0fldlto zfvfsf] Pp6f s8f lgod xf] .
k"j]{If0fsf] lgldQ Kn]g6]a'n kmfobfhgs x'G5 .
lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?sf] ;aeGbf plrt l:yltx?sf] 5gf}6sf] lgldQ yfxf
kfpg' kg]{ tyf a'e\mg' kg]{ k|ltjGwx? 5g\ .
#=! b'O{ j6f ;+j[ltt cj:yfgx?sf] pko'Qm b"/L
cfwf/e"t k|yd bhf{ #) b]lv ^% ls=ld=
k|yd bhf{ @) b]lv #) ls=ld=
bf];|f] bhf{ ( b]lv !% ls=ld=
t];|f] bhf{ # b]lv & ls=ld=
rf}yf] )=@ b]lv @ ls=ld=
#=@ :yfkgf ug]{ t/Lsf
#=@! cfwf/e"t k|yd bhf{sf] cj:yfgx? lqsf]0fldtLo gfkL cyjf -/_
lqe'hldtLoaf6 w]/} k6s vuf]lno ;j]{If0fx?4f/f lgoGq0f u/L :yfkgf
u/]sf x'G5g\ -#=#! x]g'{;_ .
s'dfl/ gu/sf]6

vf}uf]nLo cj:yfg
cfwf/e"t klxnf] bhf{sf] cj:yfg
gfkLPsf] b"/L

xl6ofn
a'l/rf}/
lrq !*

51
3.22 First order stations are located from the framework of basic
first order stations using triangulation only.
Kumari
4/102 Nagarkot
12/157

Burichaur
1/108
Hatiyal
fig. 19 13/163

3.23 Second and third order stations are located from the framework
of basic first, first and second order stations using either triangulation

Burichaur
1/108
fig. 20

52
#=@@ klxnf] bhf{sf] cj:yfgx? lqsf]0fldtLo gfkL dfq k|of]u u/L cfwf/e"t
k|yd bhf{sf] cj:yfgx?sf] cfwf/ /rgfdf :yfkgf ul/G5 .

lrq !(
#=@# bf];|f] / t];|f] bhf{sf] cj:yfgx? cfwf/e"t k|yd, k|yd tyf bf];|f]
bhf{sf] cj:yfgx?sf] cfwf/ /rgfåf/f lqsf]0fldtLo gfkL cyjf 6«fe;{

a'l/rf}/

lrq @)

53
or traversing (see 3.32), in which mainly a Special Trigonometrical
Survey Team will make the distance measurements by geodimeter.

Burichour
1/108
fig. 21
Note : When preparing a sketch, show the distance to be measured
by geodimeter thus :
3.24 The first, second and third order stations provide the framework
for the fourth order stations, which are the skeleton for cadastral
surveying. We distinguish in fourth order between major stations
and cadastral stations.
Fourth order cadastral stations are stations which are mainly used
for mapping (cadastral and topographic). Their density depends upon
the scale of the plan (map). There are many methods to determine
a fourth order cadastral station. Mainly the method of resection is
used for its effectiveness and speed.
Fourth order major stations are stations by means of which the
third order framework is broken down to fit better (closely following
terrain) for the determination of the fourth order cadastral stations.
The method of triangulation, traversing and intersection only are
used for the fourth order major stations.
3.3 Description of the different methods to fix a trigonometrical
station
3.31 Triangulation or (and) trilateration
We distinguish between three methods :
- Triangulation : all angles are measured in a triangle
- Trilateration : all sides (distances) are measured in a triangle
- The combination of both methods

54
gfkLaf6 -#=#@ x]g'{;_ :yfkgf ul/G5, 6«fe;{ gfkLdf ljz]if gfkL 6f]nLn]
lhof]l8ld6/af6 b"/Lx? gflkG5 .

Burichour lrq @!
1/108
l6Kk0fL M ha ;e]{If0f lrq tof/ ul/G5, lhof]l8ld6/af6 gfKg' kg]{ b"/Ldf
o:tf] lrGx k|of]u ul/G5 M
#=@$ k|yd, bf];|f] tyf t];|f] bhf{sf] cj:yfgx?n] rf}yf] bhf{sf] cj:yfgx?sf]
h'g ls lsQf gfkLsf] cfwf/ x'g\, cfwf/ /rgf tof/ ul/G5 . rf}yf] bh{fdf
d'Vo cj:yfg / lsQf gfkLsf cj:yfgx? b'O{ k|sf/sf 5'6\ofpF5f}+ .
rf}yf bhf{sf lsQf gfkLsf cj:yfg vf; u/]/ gS;f -lsQf / 6f]kf]u|flkmsn_
agfpg k|of]u ul/G5 . ltgLx?sf] 3gTj of]hgf -gS;f_ df e/ kb{5 .
rf}yf] bhf{sf] lsQf gfkL cj:yfgsf] ;j]{If0f ug]{ w]/} t/Lsfx? 5g\ . vf; u/]/
l56f]sf] nflu k|lt5]bg t/Lsf k|of]u ul/G5 .
rf}yf] bhf{sf d'Vo cj:yfgx? -If]q cg';f/_ rf}yf] bhf{sf] lsQf gfkL cj:yfg
;j]{If0f ug{sf] nflu t];|f] bhf{sf] cfwf/ /rgfnfO{ ;fgf] kfl/G5 . rf}yf] bhf{sf]
d'Vo cj:yfgsf] ;j]{If0f ug{sf] nflu 6«f+u'n]zg, 6«fel;{Ë / cGt/R5]bg dfq
k|of]u ul/G5 .
#=# lqsf]ofldtLo cj:yfg :yfkgf ug]{ km/s t/Lsfx?sf] ljj/0f
#=#! lqsf]0fldtLo gfkL cyjf -/_ lqe'hldtLo gfkL
xfdL tLgj6f t/Lsfx?sf] km/s b]vfpF5f}+ M
– lqsf]0fldtLo gfkL M h;df Ps lqe'hsf] ;j} sf]0fx? gflkG5g\ .
– lqe'hldtLo gfkL M h;df Ps lqe'hsf] ;j} e"hfx? gflkG5g\ .
– lqsf]0fldtLo tyf lqe'hldtLo gfkL M h;df sf]0fx? tyf e"hfx? gflkG5 .

55
The layout of any triangulation system as described above may
either be a system of chains (see fig. 22) or a continuous net (see
fig. 23).

fig. 22 fig. 23

3.311 Chains
A chain of triangles may consist of figures of many different types,
such as simple triangles (fig. 24, a), quadrilaterals (fig. 24, b), centred
quadrilaterals, pentagons etc. (fig. 24, c) or more complex figures
(fig. 24,d).

fig. 24

56
 dfly pNn]lvt s'g} klg lqsf]0fldlto k|0ffnLsf] cleGof; h+lh/sf]
k|0ffnL -lrq @@ x]g'{;\_ cyjf cljl5Gg pkfwf/ /rgf x'g ;S5 -lrq
@# x]g'{;\_ .

lrq @@ lrq @#

#=#!! h+hL/sf] k|0ffnL

h+hL/ k|0ffnLdf x/]s lsl;dsf lrqx? kfOG5g\ h:tf] ls ;fwf/0f lqsf]0fx?
-lrq @$, a_, rt'e'{hx? -@$, b_, s]Gb|Lo rt'e'{h, kGr e"h OToflb -lrq @$,
c_ cyjf emg hl6n lrqx? -lrq @$, d_ .

lrq @$

57
Even more complex figures may occur at the junction of two chains.
The type adopted will generally be decided when reconnaissance is
fitting the layout to the ground.
3.312 Continuous net
A triangulation net must comprise at least one continuous net of
simple triangles. In addition, wherever it is possible extra lines must
be observed. Extra lines give extra strength provided that they are not
unduly long. Ideally all figures should be regular. Variations of side
length will be unavoidable as between flat (Terai) and hilly regions,
but abrupt changes should be avoided as far as possible. The essential
angles of simple triangles and of centred figures have to be kept
above 30g, but this rule is not valid for extra lines.
3.32 Traversing
Traversing is very convenient in town areas or in a densely forested
terrain. For this it is not necessary to cut a lot of trees for
observations, as each station needs only two lines and only a few so
called junction stations need more lines.
3.321 Traverse between fixed stations
This is the general case, where traverses are tied to existing
control stations, whose positions have been fixed and which are able to
supply initial and closing bearings.

fig. 25

Note : For the orientation two initial and two closing bearings are
necessary.

58
cem b'O{ h+hL/ k|0ffnLsf] ;+of]udf emg\ hl6n lrqx? x'g ;S5 . k"j]{If0f u/]sf]
hdLgsf] cleGof;df ldNbf] ePkl5 s'g k|sf/sf cfwf/ /rgf ;'xfpFbf] 5
eGg] lg0f{o ul/G5 .
#=#!@ cljl5Gg pkfwf/ /rgf
lqsf]0fldtLo pkfwf/ /rgf sd;]sd ;fwf/0f lqsf]0fx?sf] Ps pkfwf/
/rgf ;lDdlnt ug'{ k5{ . o; afx]s ;s];Dd c? yk /]vfx? klg ;j]{If0f
ug'{ k5{ . s]xL u/L /]vfx? lgs} nfdf] eP yk /]vfx? ;j]{If0f u/]df emg\
/fd|f] x'G5 . jf:tjdf ;a} lrqx? Jojl:yt x'g'k5{ . ;dtn If]q / kxf8L
If]qdf k|foM h:tf] e"hfsf] nDafO{ km/s ug'{kg]{ x'G5, t/ PSsf;L km/s ug{
;s];Dd /f]Sg' k5{ . cfwf/ /rgfsf] x/]s lrqx?sf] ;fwf/0f lqsf]0fx?sf] tyf
s]Gb|Lo lrqx?sf] sf]0f #) ugeGbf a9L x'g' clgjfo{ 5, t/ yk /]vfx?sf]
lgldQ of] lgod nfu' ug'{k5{ eGg] 5}g .
#=#@ 6f«el;{ª
zx/L If]qx? cyjf 3gf h+unL If]qdf 6«fel;{ª w]/} ;'ljwfhgs x'G5 . o;df
;j]{If0fsf] nflu w]/} ?vx? sf6\g h?/L 5}g lsgeg] k|To]s cj:yfgnfO{
b'O{ j6f /]vfx? dfq rflxG5 / s]xL ;dof]u cj:yfgx? -elgPsf_ nfO{ w]/}
/]vfx? rflxG5 .
#=#@! lglZrt cj:yfgx?sf] aLrsf] 6«fe;{
of] ;fwf/0f cj:yf xf] -h;df_hxfF 6«fe;x? ljBdfg lgoGq0f cj:yfgx?
;+u} hf]l8G5, h;sf] l:yltx? lglZrt ul/;s]sf] x'G5 / h;n] z'? / ;+j[lto
lbs\ l:yltx? lbg ;lsG5 .

lrq @%

l6Kk0fL M b'O{ j6f z'?jft / ;+j[lto lbs\ l:yltx?nfO{ cg':yfkgf ug{ h?/L
5.
59
3.322 Traverse system
Same as 3.321 but to be avoided are :
- Traverses which cross each other without a common tie station
(junction station) at their crossing.
- Traverses running close to a trigonometrical station or close
to another traverse without a connection being made.
Fig. 26 show a good example of a traverse system

fig. 26

3.323 Circuit
Only in emergency cases, where no other solution is possible a traverse
can also be laid out in form of a closed circuit.

60
#=#@@ 6«fe;{ k|0ffnL
#=#@! df h:t}, t/ x6fpg' k/]sf o; k|sf/ 5g\ M
— 6«fe;{x? h;n] csf]{nfO{ ;fdfGo ;dof]u cj:yfgafx]s kf/ u5{ .
— 6«fe;{x? h'g lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?sf] glhs} cyjf ljgf hf]8]/ csf]{
6«fe;{sf] glhs} .
lrq @^ n] 6«fe;{ k|0ffnLsf] /fd|f] pbfx/0f b]vfpF5 .

lrq @^

#=#@# 3]/f
vfnL ;+s6sfnLg cj:yfdf dfq hxfF c? ;dfwfg ;+ej 5}g 6«fe;{ Pp6f
;+j[lto 3]/fsf] ?kdf k|of]u ug{ ;lsG5 .

61
 fig. 27
Note : For the orientation two bearings on the known station, on
which the circuit starts (and also ends) are necessary. If
possible reconnoitre somewhere in the circuit a direction to
any known station as a further check of the orientation.
3. 324 General rules
- Extremely short sides (legs) in a long traverse should be
avoided.
- A traverse should always follow the most direct and convenient
route.
- The traverse stations should be chosen, if possible, so that the
bottom of the target can be sighted directly.

3.33 Intersection
This method can be used for any fourth order station, but mainly the
position of inaccessible stations, such as towers, temples, stupas,
tall chimneys, etc., can be determined by observing the directions
towards the new stations from two trigonometrical stations, whose
coordinates are already known. But still the position of the new
station is unchecked. To overcome this, a third known station has
to be chosen and again the direction towards the new station has to
be measured.

62
 lrq @&
l6Kk0fL M cg':yfkgsf] nflu 1ft cj:yfg, h;df 3]/f z'? x'G5 / vtd
ul/G5, b'O{ j6f lbj\m l:yltx?sf] h?/L 5 . olb ;+ej 5 eg]
3]/fsf] s'g} 7fpFdf k"j]{If0f ug'{ h;df cg':yfkgsf] csf]{ hf+rsf]
nflu Pp6f lbzf ;j]{If0f ul/g] 5 .

#=#@$ ;fdfGo lgodx?

— nfdf] 6«fe;{df w]/} 5f]6f] e"hfx? x6fpg'k5{ .
— 6«fe;{n] hlxn] klg Psbd l;wf / ;'ljwfhgs af6f] k}Nofpg'k5{ .
— olb ;+ej 5 eg] 6«fe;{ cj:yfgx? o;/L 5fGg'kb{5 ls lg;fg
lrGxsf] tn e'O{;Ddsf] efu l;w} b]lvg ;sf];\ .
#=## cGt/5]bg
of] t/Lsf rf}yf] bhf{sf] s'g} cj:yfgsf] nflu k|of]u ul/G5, t/ d'VotM k'Ug
g;lsg] cj:yfgx?sf] l:yltnfO{, h:t} a'hf{x? -6fj/_, dlGb/x?, :t'kx?,
cUnf] lrDgLx?, OToflb, h;sf l:yltx? gofF cj:yfglt/ b'O{ j6f 1ft
lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?af6 ;j]{If0f u/]/ kQf nufpg ;lsG5 . t/ gofF
cj:yfgsf] l:ylt hfFr cem klg ePsf] 5}g . of] k"/f x'g Pp6f t];|f] 1ft
cj:yfg 5flgg'kb{5 / km]l/ To; gofF cj:yfglt/sf] lbzf ;j]{If0f ug'{k5{ .

63
 fig. 28

Note : For the orientation always measure two bearings on each

known station.
Each angle subtended at the station to be fixed must be
between 30g - 170g

3.34 Resection
With this method, the only angles measured are those at the new
station whose position is required, and these are made to at least three
trigonometrical stations, the coordinates of which are known already.
When selecting the stations care must be taken that the new station
does not lie on or very near to the common circle (danger circle)
passing through the three known stations. Otherwise the resection
will either fail, or the result will be inaccurate. It is advisable to use
the compass to obtain approximate bearings to the known stations
and to plot the new station on the diagram in order to determine
whether or not it lies well (say 1/3 r, see fig. 29) within or outside the
circumference of the circle through the other three stations.

64
 lrq @*

l6Kk0fL M cg':yfkgsf] nflu ;+w} b'O{ j6f lbs\ l:yltx? 1ft cj:yfgdf
gfKg'xf];\ .
:yfkgf ug'{kg]{ k|To]s sf]0f #) ugb]lv !&) ugsf] aLrdf
x'g'kb{5 .
#=#$ k|ltR5]bg
o; t/Lsfdf vfnL gof+ cj:yfgdf dfq sf]0fx? gflkG5 h;sf] l:ylt
rflxPsf] 5, / logLx? sd;]sd tLg lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?df gflkPsf
x'G5g\, h;sf lgofdsx? klxn] g} yfxf ePsf] x'G5 . cj:yfgx? 5fGbf
xf]l;of/ ug'{kg]{ of] 5 ls gof+ cj:yfg tLg j6f 1ft cj:yfgx?af6 eP/
uPsf] ;fwf/0f j[Q -vt/gfs j[Q_ df / glhs} kg'{ x'Fb}g . gq of t k|ltR5]bg
;kmn x'Fb}g cyjf pQ/ cz'4 x'g]5 . lrq /]vfdf gof+ cj:yfg c+sg ug]{ /
1ft cj:yfgx?sf] cGbfhL lbs\ l:ylt kfpg lbs\ ;"rs k|of]u ug'{ pko'Qm
x'g]5 tf ls tLg c? cj:yfgx?af6 eP/ ag]sf] j[Qsf kl/lwleq} cyjf
aflx/ of] k5{ ls kb}{g -dfgf}+ 31 r ,lrq @( x]g'{;\_ eGg] kQf nufpgsf] nflu
lrq @( df b]vfPsf] em} of] pQ/ pko'Qm x'g]5}g, lsgls gof+ cj:yfg
vt/gfs j[Qsf] w]/} glhs k5{ .

65
 2
3

fig. 29

As shown in fig.29 this result would be not favourable, because the

new station lies too near the danger circle. In such a case a new station
should be chosen for resection or another known station should be
introduced into the observing programme. To avoid the danger circle,
the following positions of the trigonometrical stations are favourable :

fig. 30

But with three known stations there is still no check that the position of
the new station is correctly fixed. That is why in the Trigonometrical
Division it is a strict rule to observe at least four known stations to
get a necessary check.

66
 lrq @(

o:tf] cj:yfdf Pp6f gof+ cj:yfg k|ltR5]bgsf] nflu 5fGg'k5{ cyjf csf]{
1ft cj:yfg ;j]{If0f sfo{qmddf k|j]z ug'{k5{ . vt/gfs j[Q x6fpg'sf] nflu
tn b]vfPsf] lqsf]0fldlto cj:yfgx?sf] l:yltx? pko'Qm x'g]5 M

lrq #)
t/ tLg j6f 1ft cj:yfgx?nfO{ lnP/ klg gofF cj:yfgsf] l:ylt z'4 t/Lsfn]
:yfkgf u/]sf] hf+r x'Fb}g . To;sf/0f lqsf]0fldtLo l8lehgdf of] s8f
lgod 5 ls sd;]sd rf/ j6f 1ft cj:yfgx? hf+r ug{sf] nflu ;j]{If0f
ug'{k5{ .
67
When only three known stations are visible there are two possibilities :
– observe the new station by intersection from those three
stations, or
– use like the fourth station another cadastral station. It will be
used just for the check during calculation in the Headquarters
Note : Remember that the resection method can be used only for
cadastral stations.

3.35 Bearing and distance

This is best explained with an example. Imagine some isolated fields
in middle of a large forest, in which at least two (for the orientation
of the plane table) fourth order stations must be established.

fig. 31

Note: As a check, measure also the angles at 1412, 1413 and the
distance d.

3.36 Elevated station

Such stations can mostly be used like a permanent target.
Nevertheless near the bottom of the elevated station, two so called
recovery stations have to be established for later connection of
any kind of survey work. This problem is most common for town
Survey. We distinguish between accessible station (such as multi-
storey buildings etc.) and inaccessible stations (such as towers, tall
chimneys etc.)

68
ha tLg j6f 1ft cj:yfgx? dfq b]lvG5g\ To;df b'Oj{ 6f ;+efjgfx? x'G5g\ M
— To; tLg j6f 1ft cj:yfgx?af6 cGt/R5]bgåf/f gof+ cj:yfg
;j]{If0f ug'{;, cyjf
— csf]{ lsQf gfkL cj:yfg rf}yf] cj:yfg :j?k k|of]u ug'{;\ . d'Vo
sfof{nodf lx;fj ug]{ a]nfdf of] hf+rsf] nflu dfq k|of]u ul/g] 5 .
l6Kk0fL M ofb /fVg';\ ls k|ltR5]bg ljlw s]jn lsQf gfkL cj:yfgx?sf] nflu
dfq k|of]udf Nofpg ;lsG5 .
#=#% lbs\ l:ylt / b"/L
o;nfO{ pbfx/0fåf/f /fd|f];+u j0f{g ug{ ;lsG5 . s'g} 7'nf] h+unsf] aLrdf
5'l§P/ /x]sf] If]qnfO{ sNkgf u/f}+, h;df sDtLdf b'O{ -Kn]g 6]a'nnfO{ cg':yfkg
ug{_ rf}yf] bhf{sf cj:yfgx? sfod ug'{k5{ .

lrq #!

l6Kk0fL M hf+rsf nflu !$!@, !$!# df sf]0f / b"/L d gfKg';\ .

#=#^ pRr cj:yfg
o:tf cj:yfgx? :yfoL tf/f]sf] ?kdf k|of]udf Nofpg ;lsG5 . t}klg pRr
cj:yfgsf] km]bsf] glhs}, b'O{ kl5 kQf nufpg ;Sg] cj:yfgx? kl5 k|To]s
k|sf/sf] gfkL sfo{;+u hf]8\g :yfkgf ug'{k5{ . of] ;d:of zx/L If]qsf] gfkLdf
a/fa/ kfOG5 . xfdLn] k'Ug ;lsg] cj:yfgx? -h:t} w]/} tNnf ePsf 3/x?
OToflb_ / k'Ug g;lsg] cj:yfgx? -h:t} 6fj/, cUnf w'jf+ lg:sg] gnL
OToflb_ nfO{ 5'6ØfpF5f}+ .
69
3.361 Accessible elevated station
The position of the accessible elevated station A was fixed by any
method described in 3.3.

fig. 32

On A itself bearings to two known stations have to be observed and

also all three angles and all three distances between stations A and
recovery stations RS1, RS2.
3.362 Inaccessible elevated station
The position of the inaccessible elevated station A was fixed by
intersection (see 3.33).

(TEMPORARY MO
NUMENTATION)

fig. 33
Besides recovery stations RS1, RS2, a temporary station should
be fixed. Then both distances (bases) between those three stations
have to be observed and all angles adjacent to the bases have to be

70
#=#^! k'Ug ;lsg] pRr cj:yfgx?
k'Ug ;lsg] cj:yfg A sf] l:ylt #=# df atfOPsf] s'g} ljlwåf/f lglZrt ul/G5 .

lrq #@
A df b'O{ 1ft cj:yfgx? RS1, RS2 sf] lbs\ l:ylt -;j]{If0f_ / oL ;a}
sf]0fx? / tLg} b"/Lx? cjnf]sg ul/g' kb{5 .
#=#^@ k'Ug g;lsg] pRr cj:yfgx?
k'Ug g;lsg] cj:yfg A sf] l:ylt k|ltR5]bgåf/f lglZrt ul/G5 -#=## df x]g'{;\_ .

lrq ##

kl5 kQf nufpg ;Sg] cj:yfgx? RS1, RS2 sf cltl/Qm Pp6f c:yfoL
cj:yfg lglZrt ul/g' k5{ . To;kl5 tL tLg cj:yfgx? larsf] b'j} b'/Lx?
-j];x?_ ;j]{If0f ul/G5 / ;fy} æa];x?Æ sf] ;a} cf;Gg sf]0fx? klg ;j]{If0f

71
observed, too. At least two bearings to any known station must be
observed-never mind from which (of those three) station.

3.4 Example
We very often have to use a combination of two or more methods for
doing our work economically.
Example 1 : Imagine a great valley with five trigonometrical
stations (of first, second or third order) on its borders, in which fourth
order stations are required, but from many parts of the valley it is
not possible to see any of the five stations first of all it is necessary
to establish a few fourth order major stations in the middle of the
valley. For this we must find a few places which dominate the
greater part of the valley and then we must decide how their
position should be fixed. Suppose it is possible to do this by a traverse.
See fig. 34, trigonometrical stations 1000,1001,1002. With help of
these additional trigonomentrical stations we should now be able to
select the positions of the other fourth order cadastral stations and
then fix them using the method of intersection or resection, whichever
is the more economical (see fig. 34. where trigonometrical stations
1071, 1072, are fixed by intersection and trigonometrical stations
1090, 1091 by resection).

fig. 34

72
ug'{ kg]{5 . sd;]sd 1ft cj:yfgsf] b'O{ lbs\ l:yltlt/ -cjnf]sg_ ;j]{If0f
ug'{k5{ .

#=$ pbfx/0f
xfdLn] ;:tf]sf] nflu b'O{ cyjf b'O{eGbf a9L ljlwx? k|of]u ug'{k5{ . pbfx/0f ! M
kf+rj6f lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?sf] -k|yd, l4tLo / t[tLo bhf{sf_ ;Ldfgfx?
ePsf] Pp6f 7"nf] pkTosfnfO{ sNkgf u/f}+, h;df rt'y{ bhf{sf cj:yfgx?
rflxPsf 5g\, lsGt' pkTosfsf] w]/}h;f] 7fpFaf6 tL kf+r cj:YffgdWo] s'g}
b]Vg ;lsb}g . k|ydtM pkTosfsf] dfemdf s]xL rf}yf] bhf{sf cj:yfgx? sfod
ug'{ cfjZos k5{ . o;sf] nflu xfdLn] o:tf] 7fpF kQf nufpg'k5{ hxf+af6
pkTosfsf] w]/}h;f] efu b]lvof];\ / To;kl5 ltgsf] l:ylt :yfkgf s;/L
ug]{ ljrf/ ug'{k5{ . dfgf}+ ls of] sfo{ 6«fe;{4f/f ug{ ;lsG5 . lrq #$ x]g'{;\,
lqsf]0fldlto cj:yfgx? !))), !))!, !))@ . oL cltl/Qm lqsf]0fldtLo
cj:yfgx?sf] ;xfotfaf6 xfdLn] c? rf}yf] bhf{sf] lsQf cj:yfgx?sf] l:ylt
5fGg ;dy{ x'G5f}+ / ltgLx?sf] l:ylt :yfkgf cGt/R5]bg cyjf k|ltR5]bg
ljlwåf/f ug{ ;S5f}+ h'g sd vlr{nf] x'G5 -lrq #$ x]/f}+ hxfF lqsf]0fldtLo
cj:yfgx? !)&!, !)&@ cGt/R5]bgåf/f :yflkt ul/Psf 5g\ / lqsf]0fldtLo
cj:yfgx? !)(), !)(! k|ltR5]bgåf/f :yflkt ul/Psf 5g\_ .

lrq #$
73
Example 2 : Imagine a very narrow long cultivated valley. It is not
possible to use either the intersection or resection method, as only
one station from some places can be seen. In this case a chain of
triangles can be established.

fig. 35
It is of course not possible to describe all problems an observer may
meet. Each must be solved according to its circumastances and it is up
to the observer to use his wits and ingenuity to find the best solution.
3.5 Satellite stations
The theodolite and the signal should wherever possible be centred
over the trigonometrical station. This saves the time of the observer
and a lot of time for computing. It also reduces the possibility of
mistakes. But occasionally on account of the terrain it may be
necessary to use a satellite station. This normally happens on flat
tops, or hills with several features each of them about the same
height. In such cases it will be never possible to see in all necessary
directions and there will always be some obstacle for one or more
directions. This problem can be solved by a satellite station. All that
has to be observed and therefore that which is also important for the
reconnaissance work, is described in paragraph 8.4.
Note: Satellite stations are best avoided in basic first and first order.
Do not forget to mention the satellite station in the
observation diagram.

74
pbfx/0f @ M Pp6f ;f+u'/f] / nfdf] cfjfbL pkTosfnfO{ sNkgf u/f}+ . oxfF g
t k|ltR5]bg g t cGt/If]bg ljlwg} pko'Qm 5, lsgeg] Pp6f dfq cj:yfg
b]Vg ;lsG5 . o:tf] cj:yfdf lqe"hx?sf] h+hL/ agfpg ;lsG5 .

lrq #%
jf:tjdf ;j]{Ifsx?nfO{ kg{ cfpg] ;d:ofx? j0f{g ug{ c;+ej 5 . k|To]s
To;sf] cj:yf cg';f/ xn ul/g'k5{ / o;sf] /fd|f] xn ;j]{Ifssf] lgk'0ftf /
a'l4dQfdf lge{/u5{ .
#=% pk cj:yfgx?
y]of]8f]nfO{6 / lgzfg lrGx ;s];Dd lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgdf s]Gb|Lt ug'k{ 5{ .
o;n] ;j]I{ fssf] ;dosf] art x'G5 / u0fgfdf w]/} ;dosf] art x'G5 . o;n]
uNtLx?sf] ;+efjgfx?nfO{ sd u5{ . t/ cS;/ u/]/ e"v08 x]//] pk cj:yfg
k|of]u ug{ cfjZos kb{5 . of] ;fwf/0ftof r'r/' f rfSnf] k/]sf]df, cyjf Pp6}
pFrfO{ ePsf w]/} kxf8L 7fpFdf cfjZos kb{5 . o:tf] cj:yfgdf rflxPsf ;a}
lbzfx? x]g{ d'lZsn kb{5 / s'g} Ps cyjf w]/} lbzfx? x]g{ s]xL afwf k5{ .
of] ;d:of pk cj:yfgåf/f ;dfwfg ug{ ;lsG5 . oL ;a} ;a]I{ f0f ug'k{ g]{ /
To;sf/0f k"jI{] f0fsf nflu of] dxTjk"0f{ x'G5, cg'R5]b *=$ df j0f{g ul/Psf] 5 .
l6Kk0fL M pk cj:yfgx? cfwf/e"t k|yd / k|yd bhf{sf] nflu lans'n}
5fl8G5 .
;j]{If0f /]vf lrqdf pk cj:yfgnfO{ pN]nv ug{ la;{g x'Fb}g .
75
3.6 Protection
Having found the location of a new trigonometrical station described
above it is necessary to site it in a safe place in the locality where it
is unlikely to be disturbed . Do not site the stations

- close to the edge of a plateau (as it might be disturbed by

cliff falls or slide),
- close to the bank of a stream or river (because it may be
moved or flooded),
- close to or on a road or a frequently - used path (except in town
survey where in populated areas there is no other solution).

If it is not essential do not site the station in a field. If possible select

such locations, where it is easy to draw good descripation cards.
3.7 Other matters
Decide the kind of monumentation to be used (see chapter 4). Try
to find the name and address of the owner and tell him about the use
of trigonometrical stations in simple words. Decide the type of the
signal and the number of trees that need to be cut down.
3.8 Documentation
Enter the result of reconnaissance in black ball-point pen on
the Description Card (TRIG. FORM 1.21, see appendix B) and
in chinese ink on a reconnaissance diagram (sketch on tracing
Paper). The Headquarters supervise the work for the diagram and
reconnaissance of basic first and first order stations. The diagram for
second and third order stations (in scale 1 inch to 1 mile) has to be
sent by the groupleader to the Headquarters for verification.
For the fourth order the diagram (1:25,000 or 1:10,000 for town
survey) will be like a part of the field documentation (necessary for
calculation).

76
#=^ ;'/Iff
dfly j0f{g ul/P em} gof+ lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?sf] l:ylt kQf nufPkl5
o;nfO{ ;'l/Ift 7fpFdf agfpg'kb{5 hxfF o;nfO{ ;lhn};+u laufg{ g;lsof];\ .
lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgnfO{ o:tf 7fpFdf gagfpg] M
— ;Dd 7fpF ePsf] cUnf] 7fpFsf] 5]pdf -lsgeg] To:tf 7fpFdf k}x|f] uP/
vtd x'g] ;+efjgf x'G5_,
— em/gf cyjf gbLsf] lsgf/f -lsgeg] of] af9Laf6 elTsg klg ;S5
cyjf xlNng ;S5_,
— a/fa/ k|of]u ul/g] af6f] cyjf ;8ssf] glhsdf -s]jn zx/L gfkLdf
hxfF 3gf cfjfbLdf c? pkfo 5}g_ .
olb cfjZos gk/] cj:yfgnfO{ v]t af/Ldf agfpg' x'Fb}g . olb ;+ej 5 eg]
o:tf] -l:ylt_ 7fpF 5fGg'k5{ hxf+ ljj/0f sf8{ agfpg ;lhnf] xf];\ .
#=& c? s'/fx?
:df/s lrGx s'g k|sf/sf] k|of]u ug]{ lg0f{o ug'{k5{ -cWofo $ x]g'{;\_ .
hUuf wgLsf] gfd / 7]ufgf n]Vg sf]lzz ug'{;\ / p;nfO{ ;lhnf] efiffdf
lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgsf] dxTj atfpg';\ . lg;fg lrGx s'g k|sf/sf] rflxg]
xf] / ?vx? slt sf6\g' k5{ lgZro ug'{xf];\ .
#=* sfuh kq /fVg] t/Lsf
k"j]{If0fsf] kl/efiff sfnf] 86k]gn] ljj/0f sf8{df n]Vg'k5{ (TRIG. FORM
1.21 kl/lzi6 B x]g'{;_ / k"j]{If0f /]vf lrqdf lrlgof d;Ln] n]Vg] -ptf/
sfuhdf k|f?k_ . d'Vo sfof{non] cfwf/e"t k|yd / k|yd bhf{sf cj:yfgx?sf]
k"j]{If0f / /]vf lrqsf] lg/LIf0f ub{5 . bf];|f] / t];|f] bhf{sf cj:yfgx?sf]
-cg'dfk !Æ = ! dfOn_ /]vf lrq ;d"x k|d'vn] d'Vo sfof{nodf k|dfl0ftsf]
nflu k7fpg'kb{5 .
rf}yf] bhf{ -!M@%,))) cyjf !M!),))) gu/ gfkLsf] nflu_ sf] /]vf lrq sfo{
If]qsf] sfuhft h:tf] x'G5 -u0fgfsf] nflu cfjZos_ .

77
4. MONUMENTATION

The station marks or monuments should be made to last. Therefore

the monumentation must be done very carefully and accurately. The
monumentation consists of one, two or even three marks placed in
the same vertical (see paragraphs 4.31 - 4.36). The most important
thing is to ensure that the centre of the first (upper) mark is set
exactly vertically above the centre point of the second (lower) mark.
We use special equipment for making monuments, called "the set for
monumentation". It consists of :

1 wooden lath (2m long) with some cutting on it

2 big iron stakes (pipes with wood inside)
4 small iron stakes (pipes with wood inside)
1 wooden rammer.

We also need a plumb bob, spirit level, beater, 2 chisels (30cm and
50cm long), steel tape (2 or 3m long), string (nylon ball), small nails,
ball-point pen (dot pen) , TRIG. FORM 1.21 (Description card).

4.1 How to construct a monument

First dig a hole with sides 1.20m×0.80m and from 1.30 to 1.40m
deep, putting the soil near the shorter sides of the hole (the exact
size of the hole depends upon the type of monumentaion to be
constructed - see paragraphs 4.31 - 4.36).

78
$= :df/s lrGx uf8\g]

cj:yfg lrGx cyjf :df/s lrGx w]/}] ;do;Dd /xg ;Sg] x'g'kb{5 . To;sf/0f
:df/s lrGx uf8\g] sfd xf]l;of/Lk"j{s / z'4 t/Lsfn] ug'{kb{5 . :df/s
lrGx uf8\bf Pp6} cg'nDadf Pp6f, b'O{j6f cyjf tLgj6f lrGx klg /flvG5
-cg'R5]b $=#! — $=#^ x]g'{;_ . ;aeGbf dxTjk"0f{ s'/f of] kSsf ug'{ xf] ls klxnf],
bf];|f] / tNnf] lrGxsf] s]Gb| ljGb"sf] 7ØfSs} dfly cg'nDa /fVg' xf] . xfdLx?
:df/s lrGx uf8\gsf] nflu ljz]if ;fh ;fdfg k|of]u ub{5f}+ h;nfO{ æ:df/s lrGx
uf8\g] ;fdfgx?sf] ;d"xÆ elgG5 . o;df lgDg ;fdfgx? x'G5g\ M

Pp6f -@ ld= nfdf]_ sf7sf] h'jf h;sf] b'a} 5]pdf sfl6Psf] x'G5
b"O{ j6f 7"nf] kmnfd] lsNnf -leq sf7 /flvPsf] gnL_
rf/j6f ;fgf] kmnfd] lsNnf -leq sf7 /flvPsf gnLx?_
Pp6f sf7sf] d'+u|f]

o;sf] cltl/Qm xfdL lgDg rLhx? klg k|of]u ub{5f}+ M cg'nDa ;"rs,
;dtn ;"rs, 6]7f b'O{j6f l5gf -#) ;]= ld= / %) ;]= ld= nfdf]_, @
cyjf # ld= nfdf] O:kftsf] gfKg] lkmQf, gfOngsf] 8f]/L, ;fgf] lsnf, 86k]g,
TRIG. FORM: 1.21 -ljj/0f sf8{ _ .

$=! :df/s lrGx s;/L uf8\g]

klxnf vfN8f]sf] 5f]6f] e"hfx?kl§ df6f] /fv]/ !=@) ld × )=*) ld= / !=#)
ld= b]vL !=$) ld= ulx/f] vfN8f] vGg';\ -vfN8f]sf] ;fOh :df/s lrGx uf8\g]
lsl;ddf klg e/ kb{5 — cg'R5]b $=#!—$=#^ x]g'{;\_ .

79
After having dug the hole, drive in the two big iron stakes near the
longer sides of the hole, but not too near the edges of the hole.
BIG STAKE

SOIL

SOIL

BIG STAKE

fig. 36

Then put the wooden lath on the two big iron stakes and fix it to each
one with a nail as shown in following figure.

fig. 37
Then hammer a nail in the middle of the wooden lath and tie the
string of the plumb bob to it as shown in the figure 38. Remember
whether the string was on the left or right hand side of the nail (make
a "x" mark) as you will use the plumb bob several time again during
the monumentation work.

80
To;kl5 b"O{j6f 7"nf kmnfd] lsNnf vfN8f]sf] nfdf] e"hfkl§ e"O{df uf8\g],
vf8nsf] lsgf/f glhs xf]Og .

lrq #^
To;kl5 sf7sf] h'jfnfO{ b'O{j6f 7"nf kmnfd] lsNnfdfly /fVg] / tn b]vfOPsf]
lrq h:t} k|To]snfO{ Pp6f lsNnf;+u} /fVg';\ .

lrq #&
To;kl5 sf7sf] h'jfsf] aLrdf Pp6f lsNnf 7f]Sg';\ / lrq #* df b]vfOP
h:t} cg'nDa ;"rssf] 8f]/L o;df af+Wg';\ . 8f]/L lsnfsf] b]a|] of bflxg]kl§

81
Then drive in the four small iron stakes and tie strings to the nails
which are driven in the stakes. In such a way you will get two lines,

fig. 38

represented by two strings. Both strings should always pass under

the wooden lath and they should gently touch the string of the
hanging plumb bob.

fig. 39

82
stf 5, ljrf/ ug'{;\ -lrGx æxÆ /fVg'_ lsgls :df/s lrGx uf8\g] sfdsf]
l;nl;nfdf cg'nDa ;"rs w]/} kN6 k|of]u ug'{kg]{5 .

lrq #*

To;kl5 rf/j6f ;fgf kmnfd] lsNnfx? e"O{df 7f]Sg] / o;df 7f]lsPsf

lsNnfx?df 8f]/Lx? af+Wg';\ . o;/L b'O{j6f 8f]/Laf6 ag]sf b'O{j6f /]vfx?
kfpg] 5f}+ .

lrq #(

83
Make sure that both strings are NOT touching each other and that
they cross each other approximately at a right angle (100g). Place
all four stakes at least 2 -3 metres from the edges of the hole so that
you can easily work around the hole without any danger that you
will damage their position. These four small iron stakes and their
common position serves as a check of the right position of the plumb
bob.

Now is the time to put in the second (lower) mark. As a second

mark you can use : concrete slab, brass mark or earth-en-ware cone
(see paragraph 4.2 for the sizes and paragraph 4.3 for the types of
monumentation). But before putting in the second mark remove
roots, small stones or water from the bottom. After laying the second
mark, check whether its centre point is exactly under the plumb bob.
If a concrete slab is used for the second mark check its horizontal
position with a spirit level.

fig. 40
Then put soil around the second mark and ram it down carefully at
first by hand and then with the rammer. After that, check the position
of the second mark again with the plumb bob (and with the spirit
level if concrete slab was used). If it is not exactly correct move the
second mark until it is right. Ram down the soil round the second
mark and check the position of the centre point with plumb bob
again. Measuring with a 3m long steel tape find the depth of the
second mark below the wooden lath - from the top of the second mark

84
b'a} 8f]/Lx? ;+w} sf7sf] h'jfsf] d'lGt/af6 x'g'kb{5 / ltgLx?n] em'l08Psf]
cg'nDa ;"rssf] 8f]/LnfO{ lj:tf/} 5f]Psf] x'g' kb{5 .
lglZrt ug'{;\ ls b'a} 8f]/Ln] Ps csf{;+u 5f]Psf 5}gg\ / ltgLx?n] cfk;df
s/La Pp6f ;dsf]0f -!)) ug_ df sf6\g'kb{5 . rf/}j6f ;fgf lsNnfx? vfN8f]
vg]sf] 7fpFaf6 sd;]sd @—# ld6/ k/ e"O{df uf8\g'kb{5 . o;f] ubf{ vfN8f]leq
:df/s lrGx uf8\g] sfd ug{ w]/} ;lhnf] tyf leq uf8L ;s]sf] Kn]6, :tDenfO{
o;sf] l:yltaf6 laufg{ ;ls+b}g . oL rf/ ;fgf kmnfd] lsNnfx?n] b'O{j6f
8f]/Lsf] cGt/ 5]bg kQf nufpg dbt ub{5 h;af6 cg'nDa ;"rssf] 7Ls
l:ylt hf+Rg k|of]u ul/G5 .
ca bf];|f] -tNnf]_ lrGx /fVg';\ . bf];|f] lrGxsf] nflu s+lqm6, lkQnsf] lrGx, df6f]sf]
lk/fld8 k|of]u ug{ ;lsG5 -cg'R5]b $=@ cfsf/sf] nflu / cg'R5]b $=# :df/s
lrGx uf8\g] t/Lsfx?sf] nflu x]g'{;\_ . t/ bf];|f] lrGx /fVg'eGbf cufl8 lk+waf6
?vsf h/fx?, ;fgf 9'Ëfx? cyjf kfgL lgsfNg';\ . bf];|f] lrGx ufl8;s]kl5
o;sf] s]Gb| ljGb" cg'nDa ;"rssf] 7ØfSs} d'lGt/ 5 ls 5}g eg]/ hf+Rgf];\ .
olb bf];|f] lrGxsf] nflu s+lqm6sf] Kn]6 k|of]u ul/Psf] 5 eg] o;sf] ;dtn
l:ylt ;dtn ;"rsåf/f hf+Rgf];\ .

lrq $)

To;kl5 bf];|f] lrGxsf] rf/}lt/ df6f] /fVgf];\ / klxn] xftn] lj:tf/} vfb\gf];\ /
To;kl5 d'+u|]n] vf+b\gf];\ . clg bf];|f] lrGxsf] l:ylt cg'nDa ;"rsaf6 hf+Rg';\
-/ s+lqm6sf] Kn]6 k|of]u u/]sf] eP ;dtn ;"rsåf/f hf+Rg';\_ . olb of] Psbd
85
to the nail on the wooden lath. Write the measurement immediately
in the Description Card (TRIG. FORM 1.21) in ball-point
pen. Then remove the plumb bob and the wooden lath carefully
from the two big iron stakes. Put at least 0.30 metres of soil on the
top of the second mark without moving it and carefully ram down
the soil with the wooden rammer.

fig. 41

Then lower the first mark into the hole. For a first mark the concrete
pillar is mainly used. If for some reason this is not possible you can
use the brass mark (see paragraph 4.3). Fix the wooden lath into
position on the two big iron stakes again and hang the plumb bob on
the nail of the wooden lath.

fig. 42

86
/fd|f];+u 7Ls 5}g eg] bf];|f] lrGxnfO{ l7s gx'~h]n rnfpgf];\ . bf];|f] lrGxsf]
rf/}lt/ df6f] ;Dd kfgf]{;\ / km]l/ cg'nDa ;"rsåf/f s]Gb| ljGb" hf+Rgf];\ .
# ld6/sf] kmnfdsf] lsQfåf/f bf;|f] lrGxsf] dflyb]lv sf7sf] h'jfsf] sLnf;Dd
gfKgf];\ . gfknfO{ t'¿Gt ljj/0f sf8{ TRIG. FORM 1.21 df 86k]gåf/f
n]Vg'xf];\ . h'jf To;kl5 b'O{j6f 7"nf kmnfd] lsnfaf6 cg'nDa ;"rs / sf7sf]
xf]l;of/Lk"j{s x6fpgf];\ . bf]>f] lrGxnfO{ gxNnfOsg sDtLdf #) ;]=ld= df6f]
o; dfly /fVgf];\ / sf7sf] d'+u|f]n] df6f]nfO{ xf]l;of/Ll;t vf+bgf];\ .

lrq $!
To;kl5 klxnf] lrGxnfO{ vfN8f]df v;fNgf];\, vf;u/]/ klxnf] lrGxdf s+lqm6
:tDe k|of]u ul/G5 . olb s'g} sf/0fjz of] c;Dej eP lkQnsf] lrGx

lrq $@
87
Be careful and check that the string of the plumb bob is hanging on
the nail from the same side as at the beginning. Move the first mark
until the plumb bob is exactly over the centre point of the first mark.
If a concrete pillar is used for the first mark check its horizontal
position with a spirit level.
Now fill up the hole slowly with soil, ramming it and check several
times that the centre point of the first mark is in its right place. Fill
the hole gradually and ram immediately after each layer. When the
hole is completely filled with rammed soil then check the correct
position of the first mark once more. This time make the check with
plumb bob and even with the crossed strings. If the strings do not
gently touch the string of the hanging plumb bob you must repeat
the complete monumentation of the station again, because either one
of your chainmen or you must have moved either the wooden lath
or one or more of the iron stakes during the work. That means that
the centre point of the first mark is not exactly vertically above the
centre point of the second (lower) mark.

fig. 43

88
k|of]u ug{ ;lsG5 -cg'R5]b $=# df x]g'{;\_ . sf7sf] h'jfnfO{ kmnfdsf b'O{
7"nf sLnfdf km]l/ :yfkgf ugf]{;\ / sf7sf] h'jfsf] lsnfdf cg'nDa ;"rs
e'm08Øfpg'xf];\ . xf]l;of/ x'g';\ hf+Rg';\ ls cg'nDa ;"rs oGqsf] wfuf]
z'¿df htfkl§ e'ml08Psf] lyof] Tot}kl§ e'ml08Psf] xf];\ . klxnf] lrGxnfO{
rnfpg'xf];\ ha;Dd s]Gb| ljGb" cg'nDa ;"rs oGqsf] 7Ls d'lGt/ xf];\ .
olb klxnf] lrGx s+lqm6sf] :tDe k|of]u ul/Psf] 5 eg] o;sf] ;dtn l:ylt
;dtn ;"rsåf/f hf+Rgf];\ .
cj lj:tf/} df6f] vf+b]/ / klxnf] lrGxsf] s]Gb| ljGb" 7Ls 7fFpdf 5 ls 5}g
eg]/ s]xL k6s hf+Rgf];\ . lj:tf/} vfN8f] egf]{;\ / To;kl5 t'?Gt vf+b\gf];\ .
vf+b]sf] df6f]n] ha vfN8f] k"/} el/G5 klxnf] lrGxsf] l:ylt PskN6 km]l/
hf+Rgf];\ . o; k6s cg'nDa ;"rs oGqåf/f / 8f]/Lsf] cg'R5]bgaf6 klg
klxnf] lrGxsf] s]Gb| ljGb" hf+Rgf];\ . olb e'ml08/x]sf] cg'nDa ;"rssf]
wfuf]n] 8f]/LnfO{ lj:tf/} 5'+b}g eg] cj:yfgsf] k"/} :df/s lrGx uf8\g] sfd
bf]/Øfpg'kb{5 lsgeg] sfdsf l;nl;nfdf ls h+hL/bf/n] cyjf tkfO{n] g}
sf7sf] h'jf cyjf Ps of a9L kmnfd] sLnf rnfOPsf] x'g'kb{5 . o;sf]

lrq $#

89
When everything is completely on centre, using a 3m long steel
tape, measure how far the top of the first mark lies below the nail
on the wooden lath. Write the measurement immediately in the
Description Card (TRIG. FORM 1.21) in ball-point pen.
Now you can remove the wooden lath and all six stakes, too. Finally
cover up the first mark with some soil as far as ground level and put
a pile of stones (cairn) on top of it, about 0.70m -1.00m high. This
cairn will protect the station and even will signalize its location, so
it will be easy even for other observers or users to find it.

4.2 Standard marks for monumentation which are used in the

Trigonometrical Division

Concrete pillar with copper rod with

4.21 diameter of 5 mm (with opening of
diamerer of 2 mm in the middle) in the
centre of the top.
size : top 15cm × 15cm
bottom 25cm × 25cm
height 70cm.

4.22 Concrete pillar with copper rod

with diameter of 5mm (with opening of
diameter of 2mm in the middle) in the
centre of the top.
Size : top 15cm × 15cm
bottom 22cm × 22cm
heigh 55cm.
fig. 44 a

90
dtnj of] x'G5 klxnf] lrGx s]Gb| ljGb" bf];|f] -tNnf]_ lrGxsf] s]Gb| ljGb"sf]
l7s cg'nDadf 5}g .
ha k|To]s k"0f{¿kn] Pp6} cg'nDadf kb{5g\ #=ld=sf] :kftsf] lkmQfåf/ sf7sf]
h'jfsf] sLnfb]lv klxnf] lrGxsf] dfly;Dd gfKg'xf];\ . gfknfO{ ljj/0f sf8{
(TRIG. FORM 1.21) df 86k]gåf/f t'¿Gt} n]Vgf];\ . ca sf7sf] h'jf / 5
j6} sLnf x6fpg'xf];\ .
cGTodf klxnf] lrGxnfO{ s]xL df6f]n] hdLg;Dd 9fSgf];\ / o;dfly s/Lj
)=&) ld= — ! ld= cUnf] 9'+ufsf] y'k|f] /fVgf];\ . of] 9'+ufsf] y'k|f]n] cj:yfgsf]
;'/Iff ub{5 / o;sf] :yfg klg ;+s]t ub{5 . To;sf/0f ;j]{Ifs / c¿ k|of]u
ug]{x¿nfO{ klg cj:yfg kQf nufpg o;n] d2t ub{5 .
$=@ :df/s lrGx uf8\gsf] nflu cfbz{ :t/ lrGxx¿ h'g lqsf]0fldtLo
l8lehgdf k|of]u ul/G5

$=@! s+lqm6 :tDesf] tfdfsf] % ld=ld= kl/lw dflyNnf]

efusf] s]Gb|df ePsf] 5]b -lardf @ ld=ld= kl/lw
vf]lnPsf]_ .
cfsf/M dfly !% ;]= ld= × !% ;]= ld=
lk+w @% ;]= ld= × @% ;]= ld=
prfO{ &) ;]= ld=

$=@@ s+lqm6 :tDesf] tfdfsf] % ld=ld= kl/lw dflyNnf]

efusf] s]Gb|df ePsf] 5]b -lardf @ ld=ld= kl/lw
vf]lnPsf]_ .
cfsf/M dfly !% ;]= ld= × !% ;]= ld=
lk+w @@ ;]= ld= × @@ ;]= ld=
lrq $$ s prfO{ %% ;]= ld=

91
4.23 Concrete slab with copper rod with
diameter of 5 mm (with opening of
diameter of 2 mm in the middle) in the
centre of the top.
Size : top 30cm × 30cm
height 15cm.

4.24 Brass mark (with opening of diameter of

2mm in the middle).
Size : top diameter 1cm
bottom diameter 3cm
height 10cm.

4.25 Earth-en-ware mark (with opening of

diameter of 2mm in the middle).
Size : top diameter 3cm
bottom diameter 8cm
height 10cm.
4.26 Galvanized pipe, filled with concrete
(with small nail in the middle).
Size : diameter 2.54cm
height 45cm.

fig. 44 b

Note: Previously (in the years 1971-73) concrete pillars 75cm and
40 cm high were used. They are not used anymore.

4.3 Types of monumentation

Note : 1. The types of monumentation as in paragraphs 4.31 up
to 4.34 are used for basic first, first, second, third and
fourth order stations.
2. The type of monumentation as in paragraph 4.35 is used
for town surveys only and only for the fourth order traverse
stations. When the station is not in a very important
place where its location could be requested in future-

92
$=@# s+lqm6sf] Kn]6df tfdfsf] % ld=ld=5]bdf -@ ld=ld=
d'v ePsf]_ .
cfsf/ M dfly #) ;]=ld=× #) ;]=ld=
prfO{ !% ;]=ld=

$=@$ lkQnsf] lrGxsf] -s]Gb|df @ ld=ld= sf] d'v

ePsf]_ .
cfsf/ M dfly kl/lw ! ;]=ld=
lk+w kl/lw # ;]=ld=
prfO{ !) ;]=ld=

$=@% dflysf] lk/fld8sf] -s]Gb|df @ ld= ld= d'v ePsf]_

cfsf/ M dfly kl/lw # ;]=ld=
lk+w kl/lw * ;]=ld=
prfO{ !) ;]= ld=

$=@^ lvof gnfUg] gnLsf] aLrdf lsnf /fvL s+lqm6n] e/]sf] .

cfsf/ M kl/lw @=%$ ;]=ld=
prfO{ $% ;]=ld=

l6Kk0fL M -lj=;+=@)@&—@)@(_ klxn] &% ;]=ld= / $) ;]=ld= pFrfO{ ePsf

s+lqm6sf :tDex? k|of]u ul/GYof] . t/ ca ul/b}g .
$=# :df/s lrGx uf8\g] t/Lsfx?
l6Kk0fL M !_ cg'R5]b $=#! b]lv $=#$ ;Dddf pNn]lvt :df/s lrGx
uf8\g] t/Lsfx? cfwf/e"t k|yd, k|yd, bf];|f, t];|f /
rf}yf lqsf]0fldlto cj:yfgx?sf] lgldQ k|of]u ul/G5 .
@_ cg'R5]b $=#% df lj:t[t u/]sf] :df/s lrGx uf8\g] t/Lsf
vf; u/]/ zx/L gfkLdf / rf}yf bhf{sf] 6«fe;{ ljGb"x?sf]
cj:yfgdf dfq k|of]u ul/G5 . t/ olb cj:yfg kl5 ;lhn};+u
vf]Hg ;lsg] 7fpFdf 5 eg] vfnL lvof gnfUg] gnL dfq k|of]u
93
 just the pipe without man-hole cover is used.
3. For the fourth order cadastral stations only the earth-en-ware
mark (see paragraph 4.25) is used as the second (lower)
mark.
4. When establishing trigonometrical stations for mapping
on the scales of 1:1,250 and 1:500, where the fourth order
major trigonometrical stations are nearer than 2 kilometres
-for economical reasons-we can use the monumentation
with the earth-en-ware mark as a second mark for some of
them. But the observation must be made as for the fourth
order major station.
5. When you use types of monumentation as in paragraphs
4.31 and 4.32 bury the top of pillar at least 10cm below the
ground level, even in non-cultivated areas.

There are different types of monumentation :

4.31 Where possible use a pillar

and a slab. The distance
between the pillar and the slab
must not be less than 30cm.
If the station is located in an
exposed place (footpath,
cultivated field, etc) the top
of the pillar should be below
the ground level (30-50cm).

4.32 If you can make the hole no

deeper than 1.00 m - as there
is rock on the bottom – use
the shorter pillar (55cm high)
and slab. But there should be
again at least 30cm between
the bottom of the pillar and
fig. 45 a the top of the slab.

94
 ul/G5, cj:yfg 9Ssg -man-hole_ k|of]u ul/+b}g .
#_ rf}yf bhf{sf] ;fdfGo cj:yfgx?sf] lgldQ bf];f| ] -tNnf]_ lrGx
df6f]sf] lk/fld8 dfq k|of]u ul/G5 -cg'R5]b $=@% df x]g;{' _\ .
$_ !M!,@%) tyf !M%)) sf] cg'dfksf] gS;f agfpgsf] lgldQ d'Vo
lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx? ha :yfkgf ul/G5, k};f lskmfot ug{
xfdLn] s'g} s'g}df bf];|f] tNnf] lrGx df6f]sf] lk/fld8 klg k|of]u
ug{ ;lsG5, olb d'Vo cj:yfgx? @ lsnf] ld6/ eGbf glhs
:yfkgf ePsf] 5 eg] . t/ ;j]{If0f ubf{ rf}yf bhf{sf d'Vo
cj:yfgdf h:t} ug'{k5{ .
%_ ha cg'R5]b $=#! / $=#@ df lj:t[t u/]sf] h:tf] :df/s lrGx
uf8\g] t/Lsf k|of]u ul/of] eg] s+lqm6sf] :tDe hUufdf eP klg
sd;]sd !) ;]=ld= hdLgd'lg uf8\g'k5{ .
:df/s lrGx uf8\g] ljleGg t/Lsfx? 5g\ M
$=#!
hxfF ;Dej x'G5 ;+w} s+lqm6 :tDe
/ Kn]6 k|of]u ug]{ . s+lqm6 :tDe /
Kn]6sf] km/s ;+w} #) ;]=ld= eGbf
sd x'g' x'Fb}g . olb :df/s lrGx
-k]6L cfjflb hUuf OToflb_ v'Nnf
7fpdf 5 eg] s+lqm6sf] :tDe ;+w}
hdLg leq -#) blv %) ;]=ld=_
x'g'k5{ .
$=#@
olb Ps ld6/ eGbfa9\tf vfN8f] vGbf
r§fgx? e]l§of] / To;eGbf a9L vfN8f]
vGg ;lsPg eg] 5f]6f] s+lqm6sf]
:tDe -%% ;]=ld=sf]_ / Kn]6 k|of]u
ug]{ . oxfF klg :tDe / Kn]6sf]
km/s #) ;]=ld= g} x'g' k5{ .

95
4.33 If you find hard rocks after
digging down 0.40-0.55m.
0.30m
use two brass marks. Put the
second (lower) mark in a
small hole in the rock and fix
it with cement. Set the first
(upper) mark in a lump of
concrete, made on spot.

4.34 If the station is on a very big

rock and you cannot dig, use
one brass mark only. Make
a hole in the rock and fix
the brass mark in with the
cement. Make very good
witness marks.

4.35 If the station is located in urban,

highly populated areas (roads,
streets, footpaths) use the pipe,
the top of which is about 10cm
below surface-see 4.26. The
pipe is protected by a man -
hole cover, fabricated from
cast iron. On man - hole cover
there is following inscription :

H.M.G.
fig. 45 b
SURVEY DEPARTMEN
TRAVERSE STATION.

The number of the station is

also punched into it for better
reference.

96
$=## olb )=$) ld6/b]lv )=%% ld6/
0.30m
;Dd dfq vfN8f] vGg ;lsof] eg]
o:tf]df b'O{j6f lktnsf lrGxx?
k|of]u ug]{ . bf];|f] -tNnf]_ lrGx
vfN8f]d'lg e]l6Psf] r§fgdf ;fgf]
Kjfn agfO{ ;Ld]06n] ;dfTg
lbg] . klxnf] -dflyNnf]_ lrGx hdLgd}
s+lqm6sf] 8Nnf]df /fVg] .
$=#$ olb cj:yfg Pp6f 7"nf]
r§fgdf 5flgPsf] 5 eg] Pp6}
dfq lkQnsf] lrGx k|of]u
ug]{ . 5flgPsf 7fpFdf l5gfn] ;fgf]
Kjfn agfO{ lktnsf] lrGx vfN8f]df
/fvL jl/kl/ l;d]06 k|of]u u/L ;dfTg
nufpg] . ;fIfL lrGxx? /fd|f];+u
agfpg cTofjZos 5 .
$=#% olb 3gf a:tL If]qsf] -;8sdf,
;8ssf] k]6Ldf_ 6«fe;{ gfkLnfO{
cj:yfg 5flgPsf] 5 eg] To:tf]
7fpFdf :df/s lrGxsf] lgldQ
lvof gnfUg] gnL k|of]u ul/G5
-cg'R5]b $=@^ df x]g'{;\_, of] gnL
lrq $% v s/La !) ;]=ld= hdLg d'lg /xG5 .
o;sf] jrfj6sf] lgldQ cj:yfg
9Ssgn] 5f]kL /fv]sf] x'G5 .
o:df tn h:t} n]lvPsf] x'G5 M
>L % sf] ;/sf/
gfkL ljefu 6«fe;{ cj:yfg
/fd|f] ;+s]tsf] lgldQ cj:yfg ;+Vof
klg o;}df n]lvPsf] x'G5 .
97
4.36 Special monumentation is done for the trigonometrical
stations of the high interest : astronomical (Laplace) stations and
the terminals of the base-lines. For this special monumentation three
marks instead of two marks are used

fig. 46
The first (upper) mark is a concrete pillar with steel tribrach (having
three slots for the forced centration) in the centre of the top.
Size : top 20cm × 20cm
bottom 42cm × 42cm
height 150cm.

98
$=#^ dxTjk"0f{ lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx? -vuf]lno nfKnf;\ cj:yfg tyf
/fli6«o cfwf/ /]vfsf cj:yfgx?_ sf] nflu ljz]if k|sf/n] :df/s lrGx
ufl8G5 . o;df dfly pNn]lvt b'O{j6fsf] ;§f ltgj6f lrGxx? k|of]u
ul/G5 .

lrq $^
klxnf] -dflyNnf]_ lrGx s+lqm6sf] :tDe -h;dfly ltgj6f Kjfn ePsf]
kmnfdsf] lqafx'_ :kftsf] 6«fOjfs dflyNnf] s]Gb|df /flvPsf] x'G5 .
cfsf/M dflysf] efu @) ;]=ld= × @) ;]=ld=
tnsf] efu $@ ;]=ld=× $@ ;]=ld=
prfO{ !%) ;]=ld=
99
This pillar has an iron construction inside which is connected with
another iron construction forming the skeleton for the fundamental
slab of the pillar. The slab is 100cm × 100cm × 20cm in size and
after completion it forms one unit with the pillar.
The second mark is a concrete slab as described in paragraph 4.23.
The third (the lowest) mark is a concrete cube 20cm × 20cm × 20cm
with brass mark (see paragraph 4.24) in the centre of the top.
There should always be at least 30cm between marks.
This complete monumentation is always protected by four pillars
(see paragraph 4.21) placed a few metres away from the centre of
the station and forming two lines, approximately perpendicular. The
station should always be exactly on the line between two opposite
pillars.
The first (upper) mark-pillar-is always set so that 1.00 metre of it is
out of the ground. In such a way it serves as a tripod and gives the
necessary stability for fine and sensitive observation.
4.4 Remonumentation
From time to time it is necessary to change an old station mark
and put a new one in its place (as for instance is the case of some
Indian trigonometrical stations or when the upper mark of the
trigonometrical station has been destroyed). The first step is to fix
the plumb bob exactly above the centre of the old upper mark. For
this use "the set for monumentation."
Then secure the position of the plumb bob with the crossed strings
(as in fig.39). Measure with steel tape the depth of the old upper
mark below the wooden lath (distance between the top of the upper
mark and the nail on the wooden lath), and write it in Description
Card (TRIG. FORM 1.21). Then remove the crossed strings and also
the wooden lath and start to lift out the old mark. When digging be
careful not to damage the old second (lower) mark, which is always
below the first (upper) mark. On finding this second mark, measure
its depth and write this in the Description Card. Then lower the
plumb bob and check if the position of the old second mark is in

100
o; lkn/leq kmnfd] agfj6 x'G5 h'g csf]{ kmnfd] agfj6;+u hf]l8Psf] x'G5, of]
bf];f| ] kmnfd] agfj6 d"ne"t Kn]6sf] cfwf/ algPsf] x'G5 . of] d"ne"t Kn]6sf] gfk
!)) ;]=ld= × !)) ;]=ld= ×@) ;]=ld= x'G5 / of] s+lqm6 :tDed} hf]l8Psf] x'G5 .
bf];f| ] lrGx s+lqm6sf] Kn]6 x'G5 -cg'R5]b $=@# df j0f{g ul/Psf]_ . t];f| ] -;a}eGbf
d'lgsf]_ lrGx s+lqm6 3g xf] h;sf] gfk @) ;]=ld= ×@) ;]=ld= ×@) ;]= ld= 5,
o;sf] dflyNnf] s]Gb|df lkQnsf] lrGx /fv]sf] x'G5 -cg'R5]b $=@$ x]g; {' _\ .
x/]s lrGxsf] aLrsf] km/s sd;]sd #) ;]=ld= x'g'k5{ .
of] :df/s lrGx o:sf] s]Gb|af6 s]lx dL6/ k/ rf/ j6f :tDex? /fv]/ ;+w}
hf]ufOPsf] x'G5 / b'O{ j6f /]vfx? Ps csf]{;+u sl/a nDa u/]/ . Tof] cj:yfg
b'O{j6f :tDesf] /]vfdf ;+u} 7ØfDd} kg'{k5{ .
k|yd -dflyNnf]_ lrGx s+lqm6 :tDe ;+w} hdLgeGbf ! ld6/ dfly b]lvg] u/L
uf8\g' k5{ . o;/L of] :tDe lqkfO{sf] sfd klg cfpg] ;+u} /fd|f] / ;"Idu|fxL
;j]{If0fsf] lgldQ rflxg] l:y/tf lbOG5 .

$=$ k'gM :df/s lrGx uf8\g]

;dofg';f/ k'/fgf] cj:yfg lrGxsf] ;§f gof+ k]mg'{kg]{ cj:yf cfpF5 -h:tf]
olb s'g} ef/tLo lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?sf] ;§f xfdL s+lqm6sf] :tDe k|of]u
u/L :df/s lrGx uf8\g] a]nf cyjf ha ufl8;s]sf] s+lqm6 :tDex?nfO{ g}
s;}n] laufl/lbPsf] v08df To;df k'gM :df/s lrGx uf8\g'kg]{ x'G5_ . o;sf]
nflu ;aeGbf klxn] k'/fgf] dflyNnf] lrGxsf] 7Ls aLrdf cg'nDa;"rs
em'08ØfOlbg] . o;sf] lgldQ æ:df/s lrGx uf8\g] ;fdfgx?Æ k|of]u ug'{;\ .
To;kl5 cg'nDa;"rsnfO{ wfuf]n] o;sf] l:ylt ;'/lIft ug]{ -lrq #( x]g'{;\_ .
k'/fgf] dflyNnf] lrGx / h'jfsf] b"/L slt 5 l:6n lkmtfåf/ gfKg';\ -cyf{t\
dflyNnf] lrGx / h'jfdf 7f]s]sf] sLnfsf] aLrsf] b"/L_, of] gfk ljj/0f sf8{df
n]Vg';\ (TRIG. FORM 1.21) . clg wfuf] / h'jf lemSg';\ / dflyNnf]
k'/fgf] cj:yfg lrGx klg lj:tf/} lemSg';\ . km]l/ vGg] a]nf xfdLn] ljrf/ ug'{k5{
ls bf];|f] -tNnf]_ lrGx larlnt gxf];\ h'g klxnf] -dflyNnf]_ lrGxsf] d'lg
/x]sf] x'G5 . bf];|f] -tNnf]_ lrGx kQf nufO{ ;s]kl5 o;sf] ulx/fO{ klg klxn]
h:t} gfKg] / ljj/0f sf8{df n]Vg] . o;kl5 of] lrGx / klxnf] -dflyNnf]_ lrGx

101
the same vertical line as the first one. If the difference "e" (known
as "eccentricity") is less than 10mm the old second mark can be
accepted as centric. If the difference "e" is more than 10mm, you
have to measure it and also the compass bearing "AZ" between the
position of the old first mark, marked with plumb bob, and between
the old second (lower) mark. Do this with the Brunton compass:

SECOND (LOWER) MARK

fig. 47
Write the distance "e" and the compass bearing "AZ" in TRIG.
FROM 1.21 (Description Card) and any other useful comments.
Replace the wooden lath and plumb bob so that the plumb bob
will be exactly over the second (lower) mark. Then remove the old
second (lower) mark and deepen the hole if necessary to make a new
monumentation as described at the beginning of this chapter.
Remember: Always use the position of the old second (lower)
mark for new monumentation.

102
Ps} cg'nDadf k5{ cyjf kb}{g hf+Rg] . olb oL b'O{ lrGxx? Pp6} ;"rsaf6
!) ld=ld= eGbf sd ePdf oL b'a} lrGxx?nfO{ Pp6} cg'nDadf k/]sf] dfGg]
t/ olb oL b'O{ lrGxx? cg'nDa /]vfdf gk/L !) ld=ld= eGbf km/s cfPdf oL
b'O{ lrGxx?sf] km/s tyf lbj\m l:ylt;d]t gfKg'k5{ . of] a|G6g lbs\ ;"rsåf/f
ul/G5 .

bf]>f] -tNnf]_ lrGx

lrq $&

b"/L æeÆ / lbj\m l:ylt -ljj/0f sf8{_ TRIG. FORM 1.21 df n]Vg';\ / eP
c? s'g} pkof]uL l6Kk0fLx? klg . sf7sf] h'jf / cg'nDa ;"rs uf]nfnfO{
km]l/ /fVg';\ tfls cg'nDa;"rs uf]nf 7Ls bf];|f] -tNnf]_ lrGxsf] dfly k/f];\ .
To;kl5 k'/fgf] bf];|f] -tNnf]_ lrGxnfO{ x6fpg';\ / vfN8f]nfO{ ulx/f] kfg'{;\ .
olb cfjZos k/Øf] eg] gof+ :df/s lrGx uf8\gnfO{ h:tf] ls z'? cWofo
cyjf cWofo $ :df/s lrGx uf8\g]df j0f{g ul/Psf] 5 .
:d/0f /xf];\ M gof+ :df/s lrGxsf] nflu k'/fgf] bf];|f] tNnf] lrGxsf] l:ylt
;+w} k|of]u ug'{;\ .

103
5. DESCRIPTION CARD

A description card is like an identity card for a trigonometrical

station. From all the information on it we can find or reestablish the
station. Each description card (TRIG. FORM 1.21) which was started
during reconnaissance must be completed during monumentation
(see appendix B).
5.1 Completion of the description card
Write first the district, panchayat, ward number, the gird sheet
number and the number of the one inch map. Then write the number
and name of the trigonometrical station. Give full details about the
monumentation (also about remonumentation if applicable, see
paragraph 4.4), the kind of land, the names of the observer, owner
and panchayat representative. List all stations which can be seen
with additional remarks about cutting trees, signalling etc.
5.11 Description written
Situation including distance from the nearest village or road, best
method of approach and nature of path, possibilities for camping,
long lasting signs for finding the station again etc.
5.12 Field sketch
In this part make a sketch (oriented to north) of the area where the
trigonometrical staion is situated. Show where the nearest village
or road is and also show route from the village or road to the
station. Sketch any prominent trees, houses, temples or stupas near
the station. It is also useful to take a bearing and distance to such
prominent points. Indicate with the help of contour lines or hachures
the shape of the terrain.

104
%= ljj/0f sf8{

lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgsf] nflu ljj/0f sf8{ kl/ro kq xf] . o;df ePsf] ;a}
ljj/0faf6 xfdLn] cfj:yfg kQf nufpg ;S5f}+ cyjf k'gM :yfkgf ug{ ;S5f}+ .
k|To]s ljj/0f sf8{ (TRIG. FORM 1.21) hf] ls k"j]{If0f ;doaf6 z'? x'G5
:df/s lrGx uf8\g] ;do;Dd x'g'k5{ -kl/lzi6 B x]g'{xf];_ .
%=! ljj/0f sf8{ ;dfkg
;j{k|yd lhNnf, k+rfot, j8f g+=, lu|8 tfpm gDa/ / Ps O~r dfg lrqsf]
gDa/ n]Vg';\ To;kl5 lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgsf] gfd / gDa/ n]Vg';\ . :df/s
lrGx uf8]sf] ;DaGwL k"0f{ ljj/0f -olb k'gM :df/s lrGx uf8\g k/]sf] eP
x]g'{; cWofo $=$_ e"ldsf] k|sf/, ;j]{Ifssf] gfd, hUuf wgL / kGrfot
k|ltlglw, ;a} lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?sf] hf] b]lvG5 / h;nfO{ ?v sf6]/
cyjf lgzfg lrGx /fv] b]lvG5g\ ;asf] ;"rL -gfdfjnL_ tof/ ug'{;\ .
%=!! n]Vg' kg]{ ljj/0f
;aeGbf glhssf] ufpFb]lv To; 7fpFsf] b"/L cyjf ;8sb]lv To; 7fpFdf k'Ug
/fd|f] af6f]sf] lsl;d, lzlj/sf] nflu ;DefAotf, w]/} lbg;Dd /xg] lrGxx?
k'gM cj:yfg k|fKt ug{sf] nflu OToflb .
%=!@ If]qLo k|f?k
o; efudf lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfg /x]sf] If]qsf] -pQ/lt/ cg':yfkgf u/]sf]_
af/] Pp6f k|f?k agfpg';\ . ;aeGbf glhs ufpF cyjf ;8s stf 5 b]vfpg';\
/ To; ufpF cyjf ;8saf6 cj:yfg;Dd hfg] uf]/6] f] b]vfpg';\ / :ki6
?vx?, 3/x?, dlGb/x? cyjf :t'kx? hf] cj:yfgsf] glhsdf 5g\ eg] k|f?kdf
lvRg';\ . o:tf] ;':ki6 7fpFsf] lbs\l:ylt / b"/L klg lng' kmfobfhgs x'G5 . To;
If]qsf] cfsf/ -agfj6_ ;df]Rr /]vfx? cyjf /]vf lrq0fåf/f b]vfpg';\ .
105
5.13 Dimensioned description
The measurements to the trigonometrical station from witness marks
must be made very carefully with the steel tape. They are made for the
recovery of the station in case the upper mark should be covered or
destroyed. The best kind of witness marks are the corners of houses
or huts, temples or stupas, also prominent single trees, electric or
telephone poles. It is also good to use big permanent rocks near the
station. With a hammer and chisel cut "V" - shaped sign pointing to
the station. Sometimes it is necessary to carry a big stone and fix it
into the ground near the station for use as a witness mark.

fig. 48

But it is necessary to emphasize that such witness marks ("V" shaped

signs engraved on the stones) are only to be used in emergency
cases if there are no natural witness marks in the vicinity of the
trigonometrical station.
In addition to measuring from the best three witness marks to the
station, the distances between the witness marks themselves should
be measured and also the perpendiculars from the station to these
distances (lines).

106
%=!# gfk;lxtsf] ljj/0f
cj:yfgb]lv ;fIfL lrGx ;Ddsf] gfk w]/} xf]l;of/;+u l:6n 6]kåf/f lng'k5{ .
ltgLx? lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgsf] dflyNnf] lrGx 9flsPdf cyjf vQd ePdf
k'gM k|fKt ug{ agfOPsf x'g\ . ;fIfL lrGxx? 3/, emf]k8L, dlGb/, :t'kx?sf
s'gfx? tyf ;':ki6 PSnf] ?vx?, lah'nL cyjf 6]lnkmf]g vDafx? x'g\ .
lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgsf] glhsdf /x]sf] :yfoL r§fgx?nfO{ k|of]u ug'{ klg
/fd|f] x'G5 h;df xyf}8f / l5gf åf/f V lrGx cj:yfglt/ b]vfP/ agfOG5 .
slxn] sfxL cj:yfgsf] glhsdf s'g} 9'Ëf NofP/ ;fIfL lrGx agfpg lrqdf
b]vfP cg';f/ uf8\g'k5{ .

lrq $*

of] hf]8 lbg cfjZos 5 ls t/ o:tf ;fIfL lrGxx? - V cfsf/ lrGx s'+lbPsf]
9'Ëf_ vfnL ;+s6sfnLg cj:yfdf olb cj:yfgsf] jl/kl/ s'g} k|fs[lts
lrGxx? gePsf] eP dfq, k|of]udf Nofpg' k5{ .
gfk ln+bf cj:yfg b]lv tLgj6} ;fIfL lrGx;Ddsf] b"/L ;fIfL lrGxx?sf] g}
aLrsf] b"/L / cj:yfg b]lv tL b"/L lnOPsf] /]vf;Ddsf] nlDas b"/L klg
gfKg' k5{ .

107
Mark the beginning of a line with 0.00 and underline twice the
measurement at the end of the line. To check all these measurements
use the nomogram.
Use the symbols printed in paragraph 5.2 for the description cards.
Remember : Complete each description card in ink using ball-
point pen (dot pen). All sketches have to be
oriented to the north. Find the direction with the help
of the Brunton compass.

5.2 Symbols for description cards

For description cards there are used symbols as in fig. 49,50 and 51.
If there is not a symbol for some object you use as a witness mark,
express graphically its plan and write its short description.

108
z'?sf] gfknfO{ )=)) n]Vg'';\ / To; gfk /]vfsf] clGtddf gfk n]v]/ To;sf]
tn b'O{ wsf{ tfGg';\ . oL ;a} gfkx?nfO{ hf+Rg gf]df]u|fd k|of]u ug'{;\ hf]
lstfasf] cGtdf lbOPsf] 5 .
ljj/0f sf8{df ;+s]tx? kl/R5]b %=@ df 5flkPsf] k|of]u ug'{;\ .
ofb /fVg';\ M ;a} ljj/0f sf8{ d;Ln] k"/f ug'{;\ . ;a} /]vflrqx? pQ/
cg':yflkt x'g'k5{ . lbzf lbs\ ;"rsåf/f kQf nufpg';\ .
%=@ ljj/0f sf8{nfO{ ;+s]tx?
ljj/0f sf8{x?sf] nflu k|of]u ul/Psf ;+s]t lrGxx? lrq $(, %) / %! df
h:t} 5g\ . olb s'g} j:t'sf] nflu ;+s]t lrGx 5}g eg] tkfO{n] ;flIf lrGx
h:t} k|of]u ug'{;, o;sf] k|f?k u|flkmsn t/Lsfn] b]vfpg';\ / o;sf] 5f]6s/L
ljj/0f n]Vg';\ .

109
Description Symbol

Trigonometrical station

Bench mark

Mail box

Flag pole

Ghat

Road pointer

Hydrant

Gate

Milestone

Telephone booth 6]= a=

Post office x'= la=, x'= uf]=, x'= c=

Pump

Water tap

Well

Tube well

Spring

Inn kf= w= ;=
Customs office, Police station e= yf= rf}=
Witness mark

Stony land
fig. 49
110
 ljj/0f lrGx
lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfg
prfO{ lrGx

kq dGh";f

em08f

3f6

ky k|bz{s

kfgL lgsfNg] 7fpF

9f]sf

dfOn c+lst 9'Ëf

6]lnkmf]g j"y 6]= a"=

x'nfs ljefu, uf]:jf/f, c•f x'= la=, x'= uf]=, x'= c=
kDk
wf/f

Ogf/, s'jf

wf/f hl8t Ogf/

d"n

kfl6, wd{zfnf, ;Qn kf= w= ;=

eG;f/ , c•f, yfgf, rf}ls e= yf= rf}=
;fIfL lrGx

9'Ëf ePsf] hUuf

lrq $(
111
Description Symbol

Brick built building

Clay brick built building

Ruined building

Canal

Canal (unplotable)

Road over the river

Bridge

Culvert

Railway over the river

River, stream

Waterfall, rapids

Railway and road(Level crossing)

Railway

Traffic lights

Road with walls

Road

Track

Telephone line

Power line

Water pipe line

fig. 50
112
 ljj/0f lrGx
kSsL 3/

sRrL 3/

eTs]sf] 3/

gx/

s'nf]

gbLsf] dfly ;8s

k"n

;fgf] k"n

gbLsf] dfly /]nsf] nLu

gbL, vf]nf

em/gf, 5fFuf

/]nsf] nLu / ;8ssf] jf/kf/

/]]nsf] nLu

6«flkms jQLx?

kvf{n ePsf] ;8s

;8s

uf]/]6f]

6]lnkmf]gsf] nfOg

ljh'nLsf] nfOg

kfgLsf] kfOk nfOg

lrq %) 113
Description Symbol

Chimney

Tower

Hindu temple

Buddhist temple

Statue

Dam

Plot boundary

Boundary line

Forest

Dominant single tree

Bamboo clump

Banana plant

Garden

Pond

Lake

Sandy land

Sloping land

Cliffs

fig. 51
114
 ljj/0f lrGx

w+'jf lg:sg] gnL

:tDe

lxGb'x?sf] dlGb/

a'4 dlGb/

;flns

jf+w

lsQf l;dfgf

l;dfgf /]vf

hËn

;':ki6 PSnf] ?v

jfF;sf] emfª

s]/fsf] jf]6

au}rf

kf]v/L

tfn

anf}6] hUuf

le/fnf] hUuf

le/fnf] r§fg
lrq %!
115
6. SIGNALLING

The following types of signals are used in the Trigonometrical

Division for the signalling of trigonometrical stations :
- ranging poles
- beacons
- heliotropes.
6.1 Ranging poles
The simplest signal is the ranging pole. Ranging poles are made
of wood and painted in 0.50 metres long stripes of red and white
colours, alternately.
With the help of a metal tripod the pole is set up centrally on the
trigonometrical station. The legs of the tripod have to be pushed
firmly into the ground so that it cannot be moved. At the top of the
tripod there is an iron ring with clamping screw into which the pole
is inserted. The tip of the pole must be placed exactly on the centre
mark of the station. The pole should be moved in the iron ring to a
vertical position with the help of string of a suspended plumb bob
which is kept hanging freely by hand a few metres away from the
station (position A in fig.52). One side of the pole and the string
should be exactly in line. Change your position by about 100g to
the pole (position B) and do the same again. Then return to the
first position (position A) and check if the vertical position of the
pole has not changed. If it has then correct it and check it from the
second position again (position B) . This must be repeated until the
pole is found to be vertical from both positions. After that tighten

116
^= lgzfg lrGx b]vfpg]

lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx?sf] lgzfg lrGx b]vfpgsf] nflu lgDglnlvt k|sf/sf

lgzfg lrGxx? lqsf]0fldtLo zfvfdf k|of]u ul/Psf 5g\ M
— /]lGhª kf]n
— a]sg
— x]lnof] 6«f]k
^=! /]lGhª kf]n
;aeGbf ;fwf/0f lgzfg lrGx /]lGhª kf]n xf] . /]lGhª kf]n sf7af6 agfOPsf]
x'G5 / kfn}l;t /ftf] / ;]tf] /ªn] k|To]s )=%) ld6/ nDafO{df /ª\ufOPsf]
x'G5 .
kmnfd] tLg v'§] :6f08sf] d2tn] To; /8nfO{ lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgdf
s]Gb|Lt ?kn] pEofOG5 . :6f08sf v'§fx? dha"t;fy hdLgleq uf8\g'k5{ tfls
:6f08 xNng g;sf];\ . :6f08sf] 6'Kkfdf s:g] k]r;+u Pp6f kmnfd] rSsf x'G5
h;df /]lGhª kf]n 3';fl/G5 . kf]nsf] 6'Kkf 7ØfSs} cj:yfgsf] s]Gb|Lo lrGxdf
/fVg' kb{5 . :yfg A sf] s]xL ld6/ b'/Ldf xftn] :jtGqtf k"j{s em'08ØfOPsf]
cg'nDa ;"rssf] d2taf6 kf]nnfO{ 7f8f] kfg{ -lrq %@_ To; kmnfd] rSsfleq
;fg'{k5{ . kf]nsf] Ps 5]p / wfuf] 7ØfSs} Pp6} nfOgdf x'g'k5{ . tkfO{sf]
7fpF s/Lj !)) ugn] km/s kg]{ u/L ;fg'{;\ -l:ylt B _ . ta klxnf] 7fpFdf
-l:ylt A_ h:t} ug'{;\ . ta klxnf] 7fpFdf -l:ylt A_ kmls{g';\ / hf+Rgf];\ ls
kf]nsf] cg'nlDas l:yltdf kl/jt{g ePsf] 5 jf 5}g . olb o;df kl/at{g
eO;s]sf] 5 eg] o;nfO{ bf];|f] l:ylt -l:ylt B_ af6 km]l/ ;+zf]wg ug'{;\ . b'a}
l:yltx?af6 kf]n cg'nDa geP;Dd of] bf]x/fO{/xg'k5{ . To;kl5 :6f08sf]
l/ªsf RofKg] k]rn] s:gf];\ / hf+Rgf];\ ls s:gfn] /]lGhª kf]nsf] cg'nDa

117
the clamping screw in the ring of the stand and check the vertical
position of the ranging pole again. Make sure that the ranging pole
is always at the centre of the station after making it vertical.
B

APPROX100g

fig. 52

A flag is tied to the top of the ranging pole for the easy identification
of the station. The size of such a flag is 0.45m × 0.45m. The colours
of the flag are a combination of two of these colours : white, black,
red, green, blue and yellow.
6.2 Beacons
There are two different types of beacons. One of these is small
(3 metres high) and the other is big ( 6 metres high).
The beacon consists of two tubular legs, a solid head and four (small
beacon) or six (big beacon) wire guys. The guys are tied to iron
pegs which are hammered into the ground at right angles to the legs.
The head of the beacon forms two opposing pyramids with sides
0.50 metre long which are toined by 0.50 metre long rod painted
red and white (0.25 metre red and 0.25 metre white), alternately.
The pyramids are covered by red and white cloth, also alternately.

118
l:yltdf kl/jt{g ePsf] 5 jf 5}g . lgZro ugf]{;\ ls cg'nDa agfO;s]kl5
/]lGhª kf]n ;+w} cj:yfgsf] s]Gb|df 5 .

sl/j 100g

cj:yfgnfO{ ;lhn};+u lrGgsf] nflu /]lGhª kf]nsf] 6'Kkfdf em08f aflwG5 .

o:tf] em08fsf] ;fOh )=$% ld6/ × )=$% ld6/ x'G5 . em08fsf] /ª oL b'O{
/ªx?sf] ;+of]u x'G5g\ M ;]tf], sfnf], /ftf], xl/of], gLnf] / kx]+nf] .
^=@ a]sg
b'O{ k|sf/sf a]sg x'G5g\ . o;df Pp6f ;fgf] -# ld6/ cUnf] _ x'G5 / csf]{
7"nf] -^ ld6/ cUnf] x'G5_ .
a]sgdf b'O{j6f uf]nf] v'§fx?, Pp6f 7f]; 6fpsf] / ;fgf] a]sgdf rf/a6f /
7"nf] a]sgdf 5 j6f tf/sf] 8f]/Lx? x'G5g . tL 8f]/Lx? kmnfd] lsnfx?df
aflgG5g\ h'g v'§fx?nfO{ ;dsf]0f x'g] u/L hdLgleq ufl8G5g\ . a]sgsf]
6fpsf]n] )=%) ld6/ nfdf] e'hf ePsf] b'O{j6f 7Ls pN6f lk/fld8x? agfpF5
h;nfO{ )=@% ld6/ ;]tf] /ª\ufPsf] / )=@% ld6/ /ftf] /ª\ufPsf] /8;+u
hf]l8Psf x'G5g\ . tL lk/fld8x? kfn}l;t /ftf] / ;]tf] sk8fn] 9flsPsf] x'G5 .
119
Under the centre of the head is a hook for hanging a plumb bob for
the rough centering of the beacon. Each leg of the beacon consists
of three parts depending on the height of the beacon ( 3 metres or 6
meters) which are screwed together. Each leg can be telescoped to
about 0.12 meter. This is very important for setting up the beacon on
sloping ground. By telescoping the legs the head of the beacon can
be brought into the vertical.
The accurate centering of the beacon must be done by using a
theodolite. Set up the theodolite some distance (about 5-10 metres)
away from the beacon (position A in fig. 53) and level it. First align
the vertical crosshair of the reticule on the centre of the station and
then turn the telescope of the theodolite up to the head of the beacon.
Move the head of the beacon with the help of the wire guys and the
telescopic legs (lengthening or shortening the guys or the legs) so
that the rod between the two pyramids is exactly behind the vertical
crosshair of the reticule.

APPROX100g

fig. 53

120
a]sgsf] cGbfhL s]Gb|Los/0fsf] nflu Pp6f x's cg'nDa ;"rs em'08Øfpgsf]
nflu 6fpsf]d'lg x'G5 . a]sgsf] k|To]s v'§f a]sgsf] pFrfO{df e/ k/L -# of
^ ld6/sf]_ tLg efudf /xG5 h;nfO{ cfk;df ldnfOG5 / k]r sl;G5 .
k|To]s v'§f s/La )=!@ ld6/;Dd otfptf ;fg{ ;lsG5 . of] a]sgnfO{ le/fnf]
hdLgdf v8f ug{sf] nflu w]/} dxTjk"0f{ 5 lsgls v'§fx? otfptf ;f/]/
a]sgsf] 6fpsf] cg'nDadf Nofpg ;lsG5 .
lyof]8f]nfO6sf] k|of]u u/]/ a]sgnfO{ z'å s]lGb|t ug'{k5{ . a]sgsf] -s/La %—!)
ld6/_ k/ lyof]8f]nfO{6 v8f ug'{;\ -lrq %# df l:ylt A_ / ;dtng ug'{;\ .
klxnf] /]l6s"nsf] cg'nDa qm; x]P/ cj:yfgsf] s]Gb|df kfg'{;\ / ta
lyof]8f]nfO{6sf] 6]ln:sf]k a]sgsf] 6fpsf]lt/ p7fpg'xf];\ . 8f]/Lsf] d2tn]
/ tndfly ;fg]{ v'§fn] -8f]/L cyjf v'§fnfO{ nfdf] 5f]6f] kf/]/_ a]sgsf]
6fpsf]nfO{ ;fg'{;\ tfls tL b'O{ lk/fld8x?sf] aLrsf] /8 7ØfSs} /]l6s"nsf]
cg'nDa qm; x]P/sf] k5fl8 k5{ .

sl/a 100g

lrq %#

121
Then move the theodolite to a position at right angles to the first
position (position B). Repeat the procedure. Then return to the first
position (position A) and check that the beacon has not been moved
from the vertical. If it has then repeat the procedure and afterwards
move the theodolite back to the second position ( position B) and
repeat again. This checking must be repeated until the axis of the rod
(connecting both pyramids) is exactly vertically above the mark of
the station from both positions.

Note : For first and second order trigonometrical framework the

pyramids of the beacon have sides 1.00 metre long instead of
normally 0.50 metre long.

6.3 Heliotropes
There are two different types of heliotropes which are used in the
Trigonomrtrical Division :
- single mirror heliotropes
- double mirror heliotropes.

6.31 Single mirror heliotropes

The tripod carrying the single mirror heliotrope is set up, centred
and levelled over the station. For aligning the mirror a stake or a
ranging pole must be fixed in line with the other trigonometrical
station where the theodolite is stationed. The top of this stake of
pole has to be in line with the centre of the mirror and the theodolite
station. Then moving the mirror in horizontal and vertical directions
the reflected sun light must touch the top of the stack (or of the pole)
in line with the theodolite station.

6.32 Double mirror heliotropes

The tripod carrying the main mirror is set up, centred and levelled
over the station. Fitted to the base of the main mirror is a radial arm
which at its other end has a second (duplex) mirror. This arm can be
moved independently of the first (main) mirror. Both mirrors can be
turned about their horizontal and vertical axes.

122
ta lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{ klxnf] 7fpFsf] ;dsf]0fdf Pp6f 7fpFdf x6fpg'xf];\ -l:ylt
B_ . ;f]xL sfo{nfO{ bf]x/fpg'xf];\ . ta klxnf] 7fpFdf -l:ylt A_ kmls{g'xf];\ /
hf+Rgf];\ ls a]sg cj:yfg lrGxsf] dfly cg'nDa l:yltaf6 ;l/;s]sf] 5}g .
olb ;l/;s]sf] 5 eg] t/LsfnfO{ bf]x/fpg'xf];\ / kl5af6 lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{
bf];|f] 7fpF -l:ylt B_ df ;fg'{xf];\ / km]l/ bf]x/fpg' xf];\ . of] hf+Rg] sfd /8sf]
-b'a} lk/fld8x? hf]8\g]_ b'a} 7fpFaf6 7ØfSs} cj:yfgsf] lrGxdfly gk/];Dd
bf]x/fO/xg'k5{ .
l6Kk0fL M k|yd / bf];|f] bhf{sf] lqsf]0fldtLo cfwf/ /rgfsf] nflu
a]sgsf] lk/fld8;+u ;fwf/0f tof )=%) ld6/ nfdf]sf] ;§f !=))
ld6/ nfdf] e"hfx? x'G5g\ .
^=# x]lnof] 6«f]k
lqsf]0fldtLo zfvfdf b'O{ ljleGg lsl;dsf] x]lnof] 6«f]k k|of]u ul/G5g M
— Pp6f P]g] x]lnof] 6«f]k
— b'O{6f P]g] x]lnof] 6«f]k
^=#! Pp6f P]g] x]lnof] 6«f]k
lqv'§L Pp6f P]g] x]lnof] 6«fk] sf] ;fy cj:yfgdfly v8f, s]lGb|t / ;dtng
ul/G5 . P]gf b]vfpgsf] nflu Pp6f n6\7L cyjf /]lGhª kf]n csf]{ lqsf]0fldtLo
cj:yfglt/ v8f ug'k{ 5{, hxfF lyof]8f]nfO{6 :yflkt ul/Psf] x'G5 . o; n¶L cyjf
kf]nsf] 6'Kkf] P]gfsf] s]Gb| / lyof]8f]nfO{6 ePsf] cj:yfgsf] /]vfdf kg'{ kb{5 . ta
P]gf ;dtn lbzfdf / cg'nDa lbzfdf rnfP/ lyof]8f]nfO{6 ePsf] cj:yfgsf]
lbzflt/ n¶L cyjf kf]nsf] 6'Kkf] 5'g] u/]/ ;"o{ ls/0fsf] k|ltlaDa k7fpg'k5{ .
^=#@ b'O{6f P]g] x]lnof] 6«f]k
cj:yfg dfly d'Vo P]gf ePsf] lqv'l§ v8f, s]lGb|t / ;dtng ul/G5 . d'Vo
P]gfsf] lk+wdf sl;g] Pp6f lqHof ?k e"hf x'G5 h;sf] csf]{ 5]pdf Pp6f bf];f| ]
P]gf -8'Kn]S;_ x'G5 . of] e"hf klxnf] -d'Vo_ P]gfdf e/ gkg]{ u/L ;fg{ ;lsG5 .
b'a} P]gfx? ltgLx?sf] ;dtn / cg'nDa cIfx?df 3'dfpg ;lsG5 .

123
The main (centered) mirror reflects the sun light directly to the
theodolite station and if the sun is behind the main mirror the duplex
mirror on the radial arm is used to reflect the sun's rays to the main
mirror. For aligning the main mirror a stake or a ranging pole must
be fixed in the direction of the theodolite station. The top of this
stake or pole has to be in line with the centre of the main mirror
and the theodolite station. By moving both mirrors in horizontal and
vertical directions the reflected sun light must touch the top of the
stake (or of the pole) in line with the theodolite station.

TS
fig. 54

Note : The observer at the heliotrope station must always during the
observation keep the sun light touching the stake (or the pole)
continuously readjusting the both mirrors in accordance with
the sun run.

124
s]lGb|t ul/Psf] d'Vo P]gfn] ;"o{sf] ls/0f l;w} lyof]8f]nfO6 ePsf] cj:yfglt/
k7fOG5 / olb ;"o{ d'Vo P]gfsf] k5fl8 5 eg] lqHof ?k e"hfdf /x]sf] 8'Kn]S;
P]gf ;"o{sf] ls/0f d'Vo P]gfdf k|ltlaDa kfg{ k|of]u ul/G5 . d'Vo P]gf b]vfpg
Pp6f n¶L cyjf /]lGhª kf]n lyof]8f]nfO6 ePsf] cj:yfgsf] lbzfdf v8f
ug'{k5{ . o; n¶L jf /]lGhª kf]nsf] 6'Kkf d'Vo P]gfsf] s]Gb| / lyof]8f]nfO6
ePsf] cj:yfg;+u Pp6} /]vfdf x'g'k5{ . ta b''a} P]gfx? ;dtnLo / cg'nDa
lbzfdf rnfP/ ;"o{sf] ls/0fsf] k|ltlaDa lyof]8f]nfO6 ePsf] lbzftkm{ n¶Lsf]
6'Kkf jf /]lGhª kf]nsf] 6'Kkf 5f]P/ hfg'k5{ .

TS
lrq %$

l6Kk0fL M x]lnof] 6«f]kdf ;j]{Ifsn] ;j]{If0f eO/x]sf] a]nfdf ;+w} b'a} P]gfx?
;"o{sf] rfn cg';f/ ldnfP/ k|sfzn] n¶L cyjf kf]n 5f]O/xg] u/L
/fVg'k5{ .

125
6.33 Heliotrope code signals
The observer at the theodolite station gives orders to the observer at
the heliotrope station by the following simple code of light signals :
"We do not see your light" ................. five dashes, five dots, etc
"straighten your mirror again" ............... dash, dot, dash, dot, etc
"observation finished today"................. ten dots
"observation of station completed" ... full light,-heliotrope
confirms with ten dots and
then the theodolite
station reconfirms by full
light again.

126
^=## x]lnof] 6«f]k sf]8 l;Ugnnx?
lyof]8f]nfO6 ePsf] cj:yfgsf] ;j]{Ifsn] x]lnof] 6«f]ksf] ;j]{IfsnfO{ lgDglnlvt
k|sfz l;Ugnx¿sf] ;fwf/0f sf]8åf/f cfb]zx¿ lbG5 M
æxfdLn] ltd|f] k|sfz b]v]sf 5}gf}+ÚÚ kf+r rf]l6 b]vfpg] / lgefpg]
æltd|f] P]gf km]l/ l;wf u/ÚÚ b]vfpg], lgefpg]===========
æcfhnfO{ ;j]{If0f k"/f eof]ÚÚ b; rf]l6 b]vfpg]
æcj:yfgsf] ;j]{If0f k"/f eof]ÚÚ k"/f k|sfz x]lnof] 6«f]k jfnfn]
b; rf]l6 b]vfP/ lglZrt u5{ /
To;kl5 lyof]8f]nfO6 jfnfn] km]l/
k"/f k|sfz b]vfP/ lglZrt u5{ .

127
7. CUTTING TREES

For two trigonometrical stations to be visible from each other it is

very often necessary to cut some trees or bushes. This has to be done
but cut the minimum necessary for visibility, only. If sufficient cut
branches only. SAVE TREES.

7.1 How to find the right direction of a line

Usually it is very easy to decide which tree or trees have to be cut.
But sometimes the forest is so dense that it is not possible to decide
on the direction of the other station. Very often one can climb a tree
close to the trigonometrical station to find the required direction.
When no tree is nearby or it is not possible to climb it try to find the
direction by means of alignment.

Find a place which is near the required direction from which it is

possible to see both stations (near A and remote B, in fig. 55).

A
B

fig. 55

128
&= ¿vx¿ sf6\g]

b'O{ lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgx¿ Ps csf]; { u+ b]lvgsf] nflu k|foM s]xL ¿vx¿

cyjf emf8Lx¿ sf6\g' cfjZos 5 . b]lvgsf] nflu sd;]sd rflxg] hlt dfq
sf6\gx' f];\ . olb k'U5 eg] b]lvg] xf+ufx¿ dfq sf6\gx' f];\ . ¿vx¿ arfpg' xf];\ .
&=! s;/L l7s lbzf kQf nufpg]
;+w}h;f] s'g rflx+ ¿v jf ¿vx¿ sf6\g'kg]{ 5 eGg] lglZrt ug{ ;lhnf] 5 . t/
slxn] sflx+ h+un o:tf] 3gf x'G5 ls csf]{ cj:yfgsf] lbzf lglZrt ug{ ;+ej
x'Fb}g . k|foM rflxPsf] lbzf kQf nufpg Pshgfn] cj:yfgsf] glhs}sf] Pp6f
¿v r9\g ;Sg]5 . ha Pp6f ¿v klg glhs} 5}g cyjf o;nfO{ r9\g ;+ej 5}g
eg] -PnfOgd]G6_ k+lQma4åf/f lbzf kQf nufpg] sf]lzz ug'{xf];\ .
Pp6f o:tf] 7fpF lgsfNg'xf];\ ls h'g rflxPsf] lbzflt/ glhs} 5 / h;af6
b'a} cj:yfgx¿ b]lvof];\ -A sf] glhs} / B eGbf 6f9f, lrq %%_ .

A
B

lrq %$

129
Mark this place with a ranging pole (point S1 in fig. 55) then mark
another point (S2) in the line to station A (or B) from which it is
possible to see the other station B (or A). Find another point in the
line S2-B (or S2-A) from which is possible to see station A (or B)
that the point S3. And again find a place in line S3-A (or S3-B) from
which the station B(A) is seen (point S4), etc, etc-until both ranging
poles are in line with stations A and B.

7.2 Co-operation with the offices of Forest Department

When the trigonometrical work starts in a district, the Geodetic
Survey Branch requests the Ministry of Forest for permission to cut
trees. When such permission is granted the Geodetic Survey Branch
informs the concerned Trigonometrical Survey Group or Team
giving them a photocopy of the permit. Groupleaders or Teamleaders
with such permits must visit the local Forest Divisional Officer to
inform him about the extent of trigonometrical work and to discuss
arrangements for keeping records of the trees which will be cut.

Each Trigonometrical Survey Team should have a register book in

which the place, the number and size of the trees which were cut
must be recorded. This register book should be submitted regularly
to the local Forest Divisional Office for verification and recording.

130
/]lGhª kf]nn] o; 7fpFnfO{ lrGx nufpg'xf];\ -lrq %% df ljGb" S1_ .
To;kl5 cj:yfg A -cyjf B_ /]vfdf kg]{ u/L csf]{ Pp6f ljGb" -S2_ lrGx
nufpg';\, h;af6 csf]{ cj:yfg B -cyjf A_ b]Vg ;+ej 5 . /]vf S2–B
-cyjf S2–A_ df csf]{ ljGb" lgsfNg';\, h;af6 cj:yfg A -cyjf B_
b]Vg ;Dej 5, Tof] ljGb" S3 xf] . km]l/ S3–A -cyjf S3–B_ /]vfdf Pp6f
7fpF lgsfNg'xf];\, h;af6 cj:yfg B -cyjf A_ b]lvG5 -ljGb" S4_ OToflb
ha;Dd b'a} /]lGhª kf]nx¿ cj:yfg A / B ;+usf] Pp6} /]vfdf kg]{5 .
&=@ jg ljefusf] sfof{nox¿;+u ;xof]u
ha lqsf]0fldtLo sfd Pp6f lhNnfdf z'¿ x'G5 lhof]8]l6s gfkL dxfzfvfn]
jg dGqfno;+u ¿v sf6\g cg'dltsf] nflu cg'/f]w ul//x]sf] x'G5 . ha
To:tf] cg'dlt :jLs[lt ul/G5 lhof]8]l6s gfkL dxfzfvfn] l:js[lt ul/Psf]
cg'dltsf] kmf]6f] k|ltlnlk ;DalGwt gfkL ;d"x jf 6f]nLnfO{ lbP/ To;af/]
;"lrt ul//x]sf] x'G5 . lqsf]0fldtLo sfdsf] lj:tf/sf] ;"rgf lbg' / sfl6g]
¿vx¿sf] /]s8{ s;/L /fVg] eGg] 5nkmnsf] nflu ;d"x k|d'v cyjf 6f]nL k|d'v
To; cg'dlt ;lxt :yfgLo jg l8lehgn clws[tnfO{ ;"lrt ug'{k5{ .
k|To]s lqsf]0fldtLo gfkL 6f]nL;+u Pp6f btf{ lstfj x'g' k5{ h;df 7fpF,
sfl6Psf ¿vsf] ;+Vof / ;fOh n]lvPsf] x'g'k5{ . lglZrt cjlwleq of] btf{
lstfj lg/LIf0f / /]s8{sf] nflu :yfgLo jg l8lehgn sfof{nodf a'emfpg'
k5{ .

131
8. OBSERVATION

There are two kinds of observation :

- observation of angles (directions)
- observation of distances.

8.1 Observation of angles (direction)

First the observer has to know how to handle a theodolite. Insutrctions
are supplied with each instrument giving detailed information
regarding its care and correct use. Nevertheless here are main rules:
8.11 Instructions for use
8.111 Setting up the tripod
The tripod should be set up in the best possible position to ensure easy

fig. 56

132
*= ;j]{If0f

b'O{ lsl;dsf] ;j]{If0f x'G5g\M

– sf]0fx¿ -lbzfx¿_ sf] ;j]{If0f
– b"/Lx¿sf] ;j]{If0f
*=! sf]0fx¿sf] ;j]{If0f -lbzfx¿sf] ;j]{If0f_
klxnf] ;j]{Ifsn] s;/L lyof]8f]nfO6 rnfpg] hfGg'kg]{ 5 . k|To]s pks/0f;+u
o;sf] ;Dxf/ 7Ls k|of]usf] ;DaGwdf la:t[t;+u ;"rgf lbP/ lgb]{zg /flvPsf]
x'G5 . tfklg d'Vo lgodx¿ 5g\M
*=!! k|of]usf] nflu lgb]{zg
*=!!! lqv'§L v8f ug]{
pks/0f ;lhnf];+u s]lGb|t / ;dtng ug]{ b[9tfsf] nflu ;aeGbf

lrq %^
133
centering and levelling-up of the instrument. It should be adjusted
to a convenient height for the observer. It must be positioned so that
the plumb bob, which is suspended from a fixing screw under the
tripod head, is 2-3 cm above the ground mark. The tripod head must
be horizontal. The tripod legs are pushed firmly into the ground. If
the shoes of the tripod legs do not penetrate to an equal depth the
centering and levelling-up of the tripod must be repeated. The tripod
must sit firmly on all three legs.
8.112 Setting up the theodolite
When the tripod is set up lift the theodolite carefully from the
carrying box (container) and attach it to the tripod head keeping the
fixing screw slightly loose. Then close the container to keep it clean
inside.
8.113 Centering with the plumb bob
Move the theodolite on the tripod head until the plumb bob is few
millimetres above the station mark. Tighten the fixing screw and
remove the plumb bob.
8.114 Levelling up
Centre the circualr bubble by adjusting the footscrews and open
the horizontal clamp. Turn the alidade (rotatable upper part of the
theodolite) so that the plate level (tubular) is parallel to the line joining
any two footscrews A,B. Centre the bubble by giving footscrews A
and B equal and opposite turns. Turn the alidade clockwise through
100g and centre the bubble by turning the third footscrew C only.
Note the position of the end of the bubble which is nearer to the
vertical circle of the theodolite, i.e. the left end of the bubble, Then
turn the alidade through 200g. By turning footscrew C only bring
the left end of the bubble exactly halfway between this position and

fig. 57

134
/fd|f] ;+efJo l:yltdf lqv'§L v8f ug'{k5{ . ;j]{Ifssf] nflu ;'ljwfhgs
prfO{df ldnfpg' k5{ . o;nfO{ o;/L ldnfOPsf] x'g'k5{ ls cg'nDa ;"rs
lqv'§Lsf] 6fpsf] d'lGt/af6 s:g] k]raf6 e'm08ØfOG5 hdLgsf] lrGxsf] @–#
;]lG6ld6/dfly k5{ . lqv'§Lsf] 6fpsf] ;s];Dd ;dtn x'g'k5{ . lqv'§Lsf v'§fx¿
hdLgleq dha"t;+u 3';fl/G5g\ . olb lqv'§Lsf v'§fx¿sf v"/x¿ a/fa/
ulx/fOdf k:t}g eg] lqv'§L s]lGb|t / ;dtng ug]{ sfd km]l/ bf]x/Øfpg'k5{ .
lqv'§L ;a} tLg v'§fx¿df dha"t;+u /xg'k5{ .
*=!!@ lyof]8f]nfO6 ldnfpg]
ha lqv'§L v8f ul/G5, af]s]/ nfg] afs;af6 xf]l;of/k"j{s lyof]8f]nfO6
lemlsG5 / cln v's'nf] kf/]/ s:g] k]r lqv'§Lsf] 6fpsf];+u hf]l8G5 . To;
kl5 leqkl§ ;kmf /fVg afs; aGb ul/G5 .
*=!!# cg'nDa ;"rs4f/f s]lGb|t ug]{
cg'nDa ;"rs cj:yfgsf] lrGxsf] s]xL ldlnld6/dfly gk/];Dd lyof]8f]nfO6
lqv'§Lsf] 6fpsf]df ;fg'{xf];\ . km]l/ c8fpg] k]r s:g'xf];\ / cg'nDa ;"rs
x6fpg' xf];\ .
*=!!$ ;dtng ug]{
v'§fsf] k]r ldnfP/ uf]nfsf/ aannfO{ s]lGb|t ug'{xf];\ / ;dtnLo RofKg]
vf]Ng'xf];\ . Pln8]8 -lyof]8f]nfO6sf] dflyNnf] 3'Dg] efu_ 3'dfpg'xf];\ ls
Kn]6n]en -6Ø"jfsf/_ s'g} b'O{j6f v'§fx?sf k]rx? A, B n] hf]l8Psf] /]vf;+u
;dfgfGt/ 5 . v'§fx?sf] k]rx? A / B a/fa/ / pN6f 3'dfP/ aannfO{
s]Gb|df Nofpg'xf];\ . ta Pln8]8nfO{ !)) ugn] 3l8jt\ lbzflt/ 3'dfpg'xf];\ /
t];|f] v'§fsf] k]r C nfO{ dfq 3'dfP/ aannfO{ s]Gb|df Nofpg'xf];\ . aansf] Tof]
5]psf] l:ylt ofb ug'{;\ ls h'g lyof]8f]nfO6sf] cg'nDa j[Qsf] glhs} 5, Tof] xf]

lrq %&

135
the previous position and note this point. Turn the alidade clockwise
through 100g. By giving footscrews A and B equal and opposite turns
bring the left end of the bubble to the same point as noted last time.
The bubble should now remain in this position for all directions of
the alidade. If it does not turn the alidade through 100g and repeat the
procedure again, more carefully.

Note: The instrument is levelled up when the bubble remains

centered in the same though not necessarily central position
for all directions of the alidade. If either end of the bubble
(after levelling up the theodolite) leaves the graduated scale
on the plate level it must be adjusted by someone trained for
adjustment (see chapter 9).

8.115 Centering with the optical plummet

When the procedure described above has been carried out the station
mark can be seen through the optical plummet eyepiece which can be
set to bring the black crosshairs (ring) into sharp focus. The central
fixing screw is still loose and so the theodolite can be slid gently over
the tripod head until the station mark is centred on the crosshairs
(ring). After the fixing screw is retightened the theodolite levelling
must be checked and if necessary re-adjusted. This is followed by a
final check on the centering.

Note: Centering the theodolite by mechanical plumb bob is preferred.

The thread and the plumb bob must be protected from the
wind by a screen if necessary.

8.116 Telescope crosshairs focusing

The telescope is aimed at the sky. The dioptric black ring on the
eyepiece is turned very slowly until the crosshairs appear sharp and
black. To ensure that the crossharis are focussed correctly the ring
should be turned back, anticlockwise, until the image just starts to go
out of focus. A small clockwise rotation will re-focus the crosshairs
so that they will be sharp and black once more. This setting is
constant for each individual observer and for the same theodolite

136
aansf] b]a|] 5]p . To;kl5 Pln8]8nfO{ @)) ugn] 3'dfpg' xf];\ . v'§fsf] k]r C
dfq 3'dfP/ b]a|] 5]psf] aannfO{ clxn] / klxn]sf] l:yltsf] 7ØfSs} cfwf efudf
/x]sf] ljGb"df Nofpg'xf];\ / o;nfO{ ofb /fVg'xf];\ . Pln8]8nfO{ !)) ugn] 3l8jt
lbzflt/ 3'dfpg'xf];\ . v'§fx?sf k]rx? A / B nfO{ a/fa/ / pN6f] 3'dfP/
b]a|] 5]psf] aannfO{ klxn] ofb u/]sf] pxL ljGb'df Nofpg' xf];\ . ca Pln8]8sf
;a} l:yltx?df aannfO{ oxL 7fpFdf /xg'k5{ . olb o:tf] 5}g eg] !)) ugn]
lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{ 3'dfpg'xf];\ / To; t/LsfnfO{ xf]l;of/k"j{s bf]x¥ofg'xf];\ .
l6Kk0fL M pks/0f ;dtng ul/Psf] 5 ha ls aan plx 7fpFdf s]lGb|t eP/
a:5, Pln8]8sf] ;a} lbzfx?df s]lGb|t l:yltdf cfjZos geP
tfklg . olb aansf] s'g} 5]p -lyof]8f]nfO6 ;dtng ul/;s]kl5_
Kn]6 n]ensf] c+zfÍgeGbf aflx/ cfpF5 eg] ldnfpg] sfd sf]xL
tfnLd k|fKt JolQmn] ug'{k5{ -cWofo ( x]g'{;\_ .
*=!!% clK6sn cg'nDa ;"rs4f/f s]lGb|t ug]{
ha dfly j0f{g u/]sf] sfo{ k|0ffnL ul/;s]sf] 5 eg] cj:yfg lrGx clK6sn
cg'nDa ;"rssf] cfOlk;af6 b]Vg ;lsG5 h'g sfnf] qm; x]P/x? -rSsf_ k|i6
b]lvg] u/L ldnfpg ;lsG5 . s]lGb|o c8fpg] k]r cem v'sn ' f] ul/G5 / t;y{
lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{ lqv'§Ldf lj:tf/} ;fg{ ;lsG5 ha ts qm; x]P/sf] cg'kftdf
cj:yfg lrGx s]lGb|t x'G5 . c8fpg] k]r km]l/ sl;;s]kl5 lyof]8f]nfO6sf] ;dtng
km]l/ ldnfpg ;lsG5 . s]lGb|t ug]{ clGtd hf+r ;ls;s]kl5 o;f] ul/G5 .
l6Kk0fL M oflGqs cg'nDa ;"rsn] lyof]8f]nfO6 s]lGb|t ug]{nfO{ u|fx\otf
lbOG5 . Pp6f kbf{n] wfuf] / cg'nDa ;"rsnfO{ xfjfsf] c;/af6
arfpg ;lsG5 .
*=!!^ 6]ln:sf]ksf] qm; x]P/ k|i6 ug]{
6]ln:sf]kn] cfsfzlt/ x]l/G5 . cfOlk;sf] æ8fOclK6sÆ ;"rs w]/} lj:tf/ qm;
x]P/ k|i6 / sfnf] geP;Dd 3'dfOG5 . qm; x]P/x? l7s;+u kmf]s; ul/Psf
5g\ eGg] lgZro ug{ Tof] rSsf km]l/ k5fl8 3'dfpg'k5{ ha;Dd 5fof+ k|i6
x'g 5f]8\5 . clnslt 3l8jt\ 3'dfpgfn] km]l/ qm; x]P/ kmf]s; x'g]5 tfls
ltgLx? km]l/ PskN6 k|i6 / sfnf] x'g]5g\ . pxL lyof]8f]nfO6sf] nflu / Pp6}

137
and the observer should note the dioptric scale number for quick
future resetting.

8.117 Image focussing

The focussing sleeve should be turned until the object is seen in the
eyepiece of the telescope clearly and without parallax. The observer
must move his eye slightly to ensure that there is absolutely no
apparent movement of the image in relation to the crosshairs. If such
a movement is detected it means that parallax still exists between
the crosshairs and the image of the object. This must be removed by
a small readjustment of the focussing of the object. This focussing
does not affect the sharpness of the crosshairs.

8.118 Sighting (pointing)

After correct focussing the theodolite is prepared for pointing. Turn
the horizotal drive screw (fine motion) until the single vertical
crosshair bisects the target or if double vertical crosshairs are used
the target must be straddled by bringing the double vertical crosshairs
into symmetrical position on either side of the target (which might
be hidden behind a single vertical crosshair).

fig. 58

Remember: Only the observer is allowed near the theodolite, other

persons, even the booker, must be some distance away.

138
;j]{Ifssf] nflu of] ldnfO/x]sf] ;+w} pxL x'g]5 / eljiodf l56f] ldnfpgsf] nflu
;j]{Ifsn] of] 8fOclK6s :s]nsf] gDa/ l6Kg'k5{ .
*=!!& 5fof+ k|i6 -kmf]s;_ ug]{
kmf]s; ug]{ l:ne 6]ln:sf]ksf] cfOlk;df k|i6;+u / ljgf Kof/fnS;sf] ;fy
gb]lvP;Dd 3'dfpg'k5{ . qm; x]P/x?sf] ;+;u{df 5fof+sf] k|ToIf rfn 7ØfDd}
5}g eGg] lglZrt ug{ ;j]{Ifsn] p;sf] cfFvf lj:tf/} rnfpg'k5{ . olb o:tf]
rfn yfxf x'G5 eg] o;sf] dtnj of] xf] ls qm; x]P/x? / j:t'sf] 5fof+sf] aLr
Kof/fn]S;sf] cem cl:tTj 5 . j:t'sf] kmf]s; ug]{ cln km]l/ ldnfP/ of] x6fpg'k5{ .
of] kmf]s; ul/gfn] qm; x]P/x?sf] :ki6tfdf s]xL c;/ kb}{g .
*=!!* cjn]sg ug]{
7Ls kmf]s; ul/;s]kl5 lyof]8f]nfO6 cjnf]sg ug{sf] nflu tof/L ul/G5 .
;dtnLo lx+8fpg] k]r -lgDg ult k]r_ 3'dfP/ Pp6f cg'nDa qm; x]P/n]
lgzfg lrGxnfO{ b'O{ efu u/L sf6\g] agfpg ;lsG5 cyjf olb 8an cg'nDa
qm; x]P/ k|of]u ul/Psf] 5 eg] lgzfg lrGxsf] s'g} 5]pdf ;dldtLo l:yltdf
8jn cg'nDa x]P/ NofP/ lgzfg lrGxnfO{ aLrdf kfg{ ;lsG5 -h'g gq
Pp6f cg'nDa qm; x]P/sf] k5fl8 n'Sg ;S5_ .

lrq %*
:d/0f /xf];\ M ;j]{Ifsn] dfq lyof]8f]nfO6sf] glhs /xg ;S5, c? dfG5]x?
/ n]Vg] dfG5] -a"s/_ klg s]xL b'/L k/ x'g'k5{ .

139
 - Handle the theodolite very carefully particularly when using
the screws and clamps on it. These must be turned slowly
and not screwed too tightly.
- Protect the tripod and the theodolite from the sun. Always
use a survey umbrella.
- The last turn of any slow motion drive screw must always
be a clockwise turn.

8.12 Horizontal angles (directions)

Directions are measured with the theodolite to two or more objects
(stations) together with the inclinations of these directions, all refer
to the horizontal plane passing through the observation station. From
these measurments (readings) the horizontal angels are obtained. In
fig.59 0 is the point of observation from which objects 1, 2 and 3 are
sighted. The axis of the theodolite telescope lies in the horizontal
plane passing through 0. It follows that the difference between the
directions 0- object 1 and 0 - object 2 gives the horizontal angle A12
and the difference between the directions 0- object 2 and 0- object
3 gives the horizontal angle A23.

fig. 59

140
 — w]/} xf]l;of/k"j{s lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{ k|of]u ug'{; ljz]if u/]/ ha
o;sf k]rx? / RofKg]x? k|of]u ubf{ logLx? lj:tf/} 3'dfpg'k5{
/ a];/L k]r gs:g] .
— lqv'§L / lyof]8f]nfO6 3fdaf6 arfpg'xf];\ . ;+w} ;j]{ 5ftf
k|of]u ug'{xf];\ .
— s'g} lgDg ultn] 3'dfpg] k]rsf] clGtd rSs/ ;+w} 3l8jt
lbzfdf 3'dfpg' k5{ .
*=!@ ;dtnLo sf]0fx? -lbzfx?_
b'O{ cyjf b'O{eGbf a9L cj:yfgx? / logLx?sf] lbzfsf] em'sfjt;lxt
lyof]8f]nfO6n] lbzfx? gflkG5, ;a} ;j{]If0f cj:yfgaf6 eP/ uPsf] ;dtnLo
;tx;+u lgb]{z ul/Psf] oL gfkx?af6 ;dtnLo sf]0fx? kfOG5 . lrq %( df
0 ;j]{If0fsf] ljGb" xf] h;af6 j:t'x? 1, 2, 3 cjnf]sg ul/G5 . lyof]8f]nfO6
6]ln:sf]ksf] cIf 0 af6 eP/ uPsf] ;dtnLo ;txdf kb{5 . o;n] a'emfpF5
ls lbzfx? 0 b]lv j:t' 1 / 0 b]lv j:t' 2 aLrsf] cjz]ifn] ;dtnLo
sf]0f A12 lbG5 / lbzfx? 0 b]lv j:t' 2 / 0 b]lv j:t' 3 aLrsf] cjz]ifn]
;dtnLo sf]0f A23 lbG5 .

lrq %(

141
Horizontal angles of the basic first, first, second and third order
should be measured when the air is clear and shimmering is minimum
(early mornings and late afternoons). Fourth order measurement can
be made at any time. The horizontal angles are recorded in TRIG.
FORM 1.11 (see appendixes C and D).
The reference object (R.O.) is used as the starting object of a round
of observation. The R.O. must always be clearly visible. Therefore
it should be situated in the north of the survey area because in that
direction the condition of illumination (sunlight) changes little. It
is even possible to take as R.O. a trigonometrical station, which in
the observation diagram is not connected with the station where
the observation is done. Objects such as temples, stupas, towers,
telegraph poles, etc make suitable R.O.'s if their tops are quite clear
and sharp. The R.O. should be approximately the same distance or
further away than the other observed objects (stations).
8.121 Choice of theodolite
For the various orders of observation the following theodolites are
used in the Trigonometrical Division :
Basic first order ............. theodolite wild T3
First order .............. theodolite wild T3
Second order .............. theodolite wild T3
Third order ............... theodolite wild T2
Gourth order ............... theodolite wild T16
Note: Third order observations can also be made by wild T 3
theodolite and fourth order observations by wild T 3 and wild
T 2 theodolites.

8.122 Sets of directions

To avoid inaccuracy in the graduation of the horizontal circle the
setting of the circle should be changed during the observation
procedure. Begin with face left (the vertical circle is at the left side)
sight the R.O., tighten the clamp and use the horizontal drive screw
to complete the fine pointing. Then set the reading of the horizontal

142
ha xfjf ;kmf 5 / cfb|{tf sd 5 -laxfg ;a]/} / ;f+em_ cfwf/e"t k|yd, k|yd,
bf];|f] / t];|f] bhf{sf] ;dtnLo sf]0fx? gfKg'k5{ . rf}yf] bhf{sf] gfk h'g;'s}
a]nfdf klg ug{ ;lsG5 . ;dtnLo sf]0fx? TRIG . FORM 1.11 df n]lvG5
-kl/lzi6 C / D x]g'{;\_ .
lgb]{z j:t' (R.O.) elgPsf] ;j]{If0fsf] /fp08sf] z'?jft a:t' :j?k k|of]u ul/G5 .
R.O. Pp6f To:tf] ljGb" xf] h'g ;+w} k|i6;+u b]lvG5 To;sf/0f of] ;e]{ ug]{
If]qsf] pQ/df k/]sf] x'g'k5{ lsgls To; lbzfdf pHjntf -;"o{ ls/0f_ sd
kl/jt{g x'G5 . lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgnfO{ klg R.O. :j?k lng ;+ej 5 h'g
;j]{If0f /]vflrqdf Tof] cj:yfg hxfF ;j]{If0f ul/G5 hf]l8Psf] 5}g . R.O.
sf] nflu To:tf j:t'x? h:t} dlGb/, :t'k, 6fj/, 6]lnu|fkmsf] n¶f OToflb klg
;'xfpFbf] 5 olb ltgLx?sf] 6'Kkf ;kmf / ltvf] 5 eg] . c? ;j]{If0f ul/Psf
cj:yfgx? hlts} -cGbfhL_ b"/L / k/ R.O. /xg'k5{ .
*=!@! lyof]8f]nfO6sf] 5gf}6
lqsf]0fldtLo zfvfdf lgDg lnlvt lyof]8f]nfO6x? ljleGg bhf{x?sf]
;j]{If0fsf] nflu k|of]u ul/G5g= M
cfwf/e"t k|yd bhf{ =================== lyof]8f]nfO6 ljN8 T3
k|yd bhf{{ =================== lyof]8f]nfO6 ljN8 T3
bf];|f] bhf{ =================== lyof]8f]nfO6 ljN8 T3
t];|f] bhf{ =================== lyof]8f]nfO6 ljN8 T2
rf}yf] bhf{ ================== lyof]8f]nfO6 ljN8 T16
l6Kk0fL M t];|f] bhf{ ;j]{If0f lyof]8f]nfO6 ljN8 T3 n] ug{ ;lsG5 / rf}yf]
bhf{ lyof]8f]nfO6 ljN8 T3 / ljN8 T2.
*=!@@ lbzfx?sf] ;]6x?
;j]{If0f sfo{ ljlwsf] aLrdf ;dtnLo j[tsf] c+zfÍgdf cz'4tf x6fpg
j[Qsf] ldnfpg] sfd kl/jt{g ug'{k5{ . b]a|] df]x8faf6 z'? ug'{;\ -cg'nDa j[Q
b]a|]kl§ 5_, R.O. x]g'{;, RofKg]nfO{ s:g';\ / ;dtnLo rnfpg] k]r 7ØfSs}
ldnfpgsf] nflu k|of]u ug'{; . ta ;dtnLo j[Qsf] l/l8ª ldnfpg' xf];\
ls 0 ugeGbf clnslt a9L dfq kl9Psf] 5 . R.O. nfO{ km]l/ x]g'{;\

143
circle so that a value slightly more than 0g is read. Sight on the R.O.
again and read the circle. The booker will book the reading repeating
it loudly (audible check). Loosen the clamp and turn the alidade
clock wise and sight on next object (object 15, see fig. 60). The
circle reading is booked and similarily objects 210,112,1,113,22,
and the R.O. again are observed.

fig. 60

After taking the reading of the R.O. the reading of a ROUND is

completed. Then reverse the telescope to face right (the vertical
circle is at the right side) sight once more on the R.O. and read
the horizontal circle. Then objects 22,113,1,112,210,15 and the
R.O. are sighted moving the theodolite telescope anticlockwise. In
completing the second round a SET is completed. A set consists of
two rounds, the first with the theodolite face left and the second
with the theodolite face right. One set gives two readings to each
object. Make a mean between the two readings for each object. Then
the mean of the R.O. should be reduced to zero (0.0000g) and the
same value (the mean of the R.O.) should be deducted from the other
mean readings (see appendixes C,D).

144
/ j[Q k9\gf];\ . n]Vg] dfG5]n] 7"nf] :j/df bf]x/ØfP/ n]Vg] 5 -;'Gg ;lsg]
hf+r_ . RofKg] km'sfpg'xf];\ / Pln8]8nfO{ 3l8jt\ 3'dfpg'xf];\ / csf]{
j:t' 15 nfO{ 6]l:nsf]kn] x]g'{;\ -lrq ^) x]g'{;\_ . j[Qsf] l/l8ª n]lvG5 / o;}
u/L j:t'x? 210, 112, 1, 113, 22 / km]l/ R.O. ;j]{If0f ul/G5g\ .

lrq ^)

R.O. sf] l/l8ª ;s]kl5 Ps /fp08sf] l/l8ª k"/f ePsf] 5 . 6]ln:sf]k

bflxg] df]x8fdf pN6fpg'xf];\ -cg'nDa j[Q bflxg]kl§ 5_, km]l/ Ps kN6 R.O.
nfO{ x]g'{;\ / ;dtnLo j[Q k9\g' xf];\ . ta lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{ pN6f] 3l8jt\
lbzfdf 3'dfP/ lgzfg lrGxx? 22, 113, 1, 112, 210, 15 / R.O. nfO{ x]l/G5g\ .
bf];|f] /fp08 k"/f ul/;s]kl5 Pp6f ;]6 k"/f x'G5 . Ps ;]6df b'O{
/fp08x? x'G5g\ . k|yd b]a|] df]x8f;lxt / bf];|f] bflxg] df]88f;lxt . Ps
;]6n] xfdLnfO{ k|To]s lgzfg lrGxsf] b'O{j6f l/l8ªx? lbG5 . k|To]s lrGxsf
b'O{j6f l/l8ªx?sf] dWodfg lng'xf];\ . tj lgb]{z j:t' (R.O.) sf] dWodfg
;'Ggf -)=)))) ug_ df kl/jt{g ug'{k5{ / pxL dfg (R.O. sf] dWodfg) c?
dWodfg lgsflnPsf] l/l8ªx?af6 36fpg'k5{ -kl/lzi6 C, D x]g'{;\_ .

145
Note : The difference between face left and face right for one object
is double the value of the collimation error. By observing
in two faces this error is fully eliminated. If the observer is
experienced his differences between face left and face right
will always be constant in value and sign (+ or -).

Never try to be as near as possible with face right reading to

face left reading - this will falsify mean readings.

8.123 Number of sets

In the Trigonometrical Division the following number of sets is
required for different orders :
Basic first order ................ special measurements
First order ................. 12 sets
Second order .................. 9 sets
Third order .................. 6 sets
Fourth order .................. 3 sets

From this it can be seen that if greater accuracy is required more

sets must be observed to minimize graduation error, personal error
and errors in pointing. When one set is finished we must turn the
graduated horizontal circle so that the reading for the next set of
observation will be on a different part of the horizontal circle.

The movement of the circle depends on the number of sets. Usually

it is 200 where n is the number of sets.
g

When re-setting the horizontal circle for a new set also change the
values of minutes (c) and seconds (cc) to minimize the error of
graduation on the micrometer.
The following table shows the approximate values of the reading to
the R.O. in face left for each set.

146
l6Kk0fL M Pp6f lgzfg lrGxsf] b]a|] df]x8f / bflxg] df]x8fsf] cjz]if
æsf]lnd]zg cz'4tfÆ sf] b'O{ u'0ff x'G5 . b'a} df]x8fdf ;j]{If0f ubf{
of] cz'4tf k"/} lgz]if x'G5 . olb ;j]{Ifs cg'ejL 5 eg] p;sf]
b]a|] / bflxg] df]x8fsf] cjz]if ;+w} dfg / lrGx -± cyjf —_
pxL x'g]5 .
slxn] klg bflxg] df]x8f / b]a|] df]x8fsf] l/l8ªx?sf] p:t} x'g'kl§
sf]lzz gug'{xf];\ o;n] dWodfg lgsflnPsf l/l8ªx? unt
b]vfpg] 5 .

*=!@# ;]6x?sf] ;+Vof

lqsf]0fldtLo zfvfsf ljleGg bhf{x?sf] nflu ;]6x?sf] ;+Vofx? lgDg lnlvt
rflxG5g\ M
cfwf/e"t k|yd bhf{ ljz]if gfkx?
k|yd bhf !@ ;]6x?
bf];|f] bhf{ ( ;]6x?
t];|f] bhf{ ^ ;]6x?
rf}yf] bhf{ # ;]6x?
o;af6 of] a'\em\g ;lsG5 ls olb a9L z'4tf rflxPdf, c+zfÍg cz'4tf 36fpg',
JolQmsf] cz'4tf / x]g{df cz'4tf 36fpg a9L ;]6x? ;j]{If0f ug'{k5{ . ha Ps ;]6
;dfKt x'G5 xfdLn] c+zfÍg ul/Psf] ;dtnLo j[Q 3'dfpg'k5{ tfls ;j]{If0fsf]
csf]{ ;]6sf] l/l8ª ;dtnLo j[Qsf] cs}{ efudf x'g]5 .
@))
j[Qsf] rfn ;]6x?sf] ;+Vofdf e/ k5{ . k|foM of] n ug x'G5 hxfF ;]6x?sf]
;+Vof n xf] .
ha ;dtnLo j[Q gof+ ;]6sf] nflu ldnfOG5 dfOqmf]ld6/df c+zfÍg cz'4tf
dfq 36fpgsf nflu ldg6x? -l;=_ / ;]s]08x? -l;=l;=_ klg kl/jt{g ug'[xf];\ .
lgDg lnlvt tflnsfn] k|To]s ;]6sf] nflu b]a|] df]x8fdf R.O. sf] l/l8ªsf]
cfGbfhL dfgx? b]vfpF5 .

147
 Number First Second Third Fourth
of set order order order order
1 0g 0g 0g 0g
2 17g 22g 33g 67g
3 33g 44g 67g 133g
4 50g 67g 100g
5 67g 89g 133g
6 83g 111g 167g
7 100g 133g
8 117g 156g
9 133g 178g
10 150g
11 167g
12 183g

Note: After finishing each set check the levelling and the centering
of the theodolite.

8.124 Tolerances
The difference between the opening and closing mean reading to the
R.O. of each set should not be larger than :

First order ............. 5cc (= 0.0005g)

Second order ............. 10cc (= 0.0010g)
Third order ............. 15cc (= 0.0015g)
Fourth order ............. 30cc (= 0.0030g)

If it is larger the observation for that set must be repeated. When

observations for the required number of sets are completed the
differences between the reduced means for each observed object
must be checked. The difference between the lowest and the highest
reduced mean of an observed object should not be larger than :

148
 k|yd bf];|f] t];|f] rf}yf]
;]6sf] ;+Vof
bhf{ bhf{ bhf{ bhf{
! ) ug ) ug ) ug ) ug
@ !& ug @@ ug ## ug ^& ug
# ## ug $$ ug ^& ug !## ug
$ %) ug ^& ug !)) ug
% ^& ug *( ug !## ug
^ *# ug !!! ug !^& ug
& !)) ug !## ug
* !!& ug !%^ ug
( !## ug !&* ug
!) !%) ug
!! !^& ug
!@ !*# ug

l6Kk0fL M k|To]s ;]6 k"/f ul/;s]kl5 lyof]8f]nfO6sf] ;dtng / s]lGb|t ug{

hf+Rgf];\ .
*=!@$ ;Ldfx?
k|To]s ;]6sf] R.O. nfO{ z'? / clGtd dWodfg lgsflnPsf] aLrsf] cjz]if
lgDglnlvteGbf a9L x'g' x'Fb}g =
k|yd bhf{ % l;=l;= -)=)))% ug_
bf];|f] bhf{ !) l;=l;= -)=))!) ug_
t];|f] bhf{ !% l;=l;= -)=))!% ug_
rf}yf] bhf{ #) l;=l;= -)=))#) ug_
olb of] a9L 5 eg] To; ;]6sf] ;j]{If0f bf]x/Øfpg'kb{5 . ha rflxPsf ;]6x?sf]
;+Vofsf] ;j]{If0f k"/f x'G5 k|To]s ;j]{If0f ul/Psf] j:t'sf] kl/jt{g ul/Psf]
dWodfgx?aLrsf] cjz]if hf+Rg'kb{5 . Pp6f ;j]{If0f ul/Psf] j:t'sf] sd;]sd
/ a9L ;] a9L kl/jt{g ul/Psf] dWodfgsf] aLr cjz]if tneGbf a9L x'g' x'Fb}g M
149
 First order ............. 8cc (= 0.0008g)
Second order ............. 15cc (= 0.0015g)
Third order ............. 30cc (= 0.0030g)
Fourth order ............. 60cc (= 0.0060g)

If the difference is larger than the tolerance the set which should be
repeated must be selected. It should be either the lowest or the highest
reduced means whichever looks odd and whichever is further out
from the mean of the set of one observed object.
Note : when you check for the tolerance it is very helpful to make
a table with all reduced means and differences between the
openings and closings of the R.O. as seen in fig.61.

fig. 61
8.125 Joint observation
The procedure for joining two or more observations at one station
into one observation is called a joint observation.

150
 k|yd bhf{ * l;=l;= -)=)))* ug_
bf];|f] bhf{ !% l;=l;= -)=))!% ug_
t];|f] bhf{ #) l;=l;= -)=))#) ug_
rf}yf] bhf{ ^) l;=l;= -)=))^) ug_
olb To; cjz]if ;LdfeGbf a9L 5 eg] Tof] ;]6 h'g bf]x/fpg'k5{ 5fGg'k5{ .
of] of t ;aeGbf sd cyjf ;aeGbf a9L kl/jt{g dWodfg x'g' kb{5 h'g
cldNbf] b]lvG5 / h'g Pp6f ;j]{If0f u/]sf] j:t'sf] Pp6f ;]6sf] dWodfgaf6
w]/} k/ 5 .
l6Kk0fL M ha tkfO{n] ;Ldfx? hf+Rg' x'G5 ;a} kl/jlt{t dWodfgx? /
lrq ^! df b]vfP h:t} R.O. sf] z'?jft / clGtdsf] aLrsf]
cjz]ifx?;lxtsf] tflnsf agfpg' nfebfos x'g]5 .

lrq ^!
*=!@% hf]l8Psf] ;j]{If0f
b'O{ jf a9L ;j]{If0fx? Pp6} ;j]{If0fdf hf]8\g] t/LsfnfO{ hf]l8Psf] ;j]{If0f eGb5 .
151
Sometimes we must make observations on a trigonometrical station
more than once. This can be due for instance to bad closuring of
triangles (see chapter 11) when the station must be repeated. Another
reason can be that not all objects were visible due to bad weather
(some part of the horizon was cloudy). At least two objects must
be the same in both observations. This gives the necessary check
(orientation) that the different observations are fitting well together
and makes it possible to compile one observation book from the two
(or more) observation books. For joint observation see appendixes
E 1- E 3.
8.126 Some remarks
The booking of the observation must always be legible. Use black
ball-point pen only. Never use an erazer. If a mistake is made draw a
line though the incorrect value and write the correct value carefully
above the cancelled one in the same box of the observation book.
Record at the top of TRIG. FORM 1.11 all relevant information
especially if the station and target are centric or eccentric.
If an observed station is outside the grid square (50km × 50km) in
which the occupied station is located the number of the proper gird
square must be written above the number of the object.
Measure carefully but not too slowly. Try to finish each set in a
short time while the weather conditions and illumination conditions
remain unchanged.
If some set or sets are cancelled because they are outside the
permitted tolerances or for some other reason do not throw them
away. Simply draw a line across the sheet and write "cancelled"
and also - if possible - the reason for the cancellation. Then clip
these cancelled observations to the good one and submit them to the
Technical Section for calculation. Even cancelled observations can
help in finding some mistakes or solving some problems.
The observer must calculate the means for the face left and face
right, their reduction to the R.O. and the means of the sets.

152
slxn]sf+xL xfdLn] Pp6} lqsf]0fldtLo cj:yfgdf PskN6 eGbf a9L ;j]I{ f0f
ug'k{ 5{ . pbfx/0ffy{ of] lqsf]0fldtLosf] g/fd|f] k"0f{tfn] x'g ;S5 -cWofo !!
x]g;
{' _\ ha To; cj:yfgnfO{ bf]x/ØfOg' kg]5 { . csf]{ sf/0f Tof] klg x'g ;S5 ls
v/fa xfjfkfgLn] ub{ Ps} a]nf ;a} j:t'x? b]lvg] lyPgg\ -lIflthsf] s'g} efudf
abnL lyof]_ . sd;]sd b'Oj{ 6f j:t'x? b'a} ;j]I{ f0fx?df pxL lyof] . o;n] rflxg]
hf+r -cg':yfkgf_ lbG5 ls ljleGg ;j]I{ f0fx? cfk;df /fd|f; ] u+ ldn]/ a;]sf
5g\ / b'O{ -cyjf a9L_ ;j]I{ f0f k'l:tsfx? Pp6} ;j]I{ f0f k'l:tsfdf lgsfNg' ;+ej
agfpg] 5 . hf]l8Psf ;j]I{ f0fsf] nflu kl/lzi6x? E1 - E3 x]g; {' \ .
*=!@^ s]xL l6sf l6Kk0fLx?
;j]{If0fsf] n]vfO{ ;+w} k9\g ;lsg] x'g'k5{ . ;+w} sfnf] 86 k]g dfq k|of]u ug'{
xf];\ . slxn] klg O/]h/ k|of]u gug'{xf];\ . olb e"n ul/P 5 eg] Pp6f wsf]{
cz'4 dfgaf6 lvRgf];\ / xf]l;of/k"j{s ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfsf] pxL afs;leq /2
ul/Psf] cz'4 rflx+sf] dfly z'4dfg n]Vg'xf];\ . TRIG. FORM 1.11 sf] lz/df
rflxPsf] ;"rgf ;a} vf; u/]/ olb cj:yfg / lgzfg lrGx s]lGb|t cyjf ps]Gb|
5g\ eg] /]s8{ ug'{xf];\ .
olb Pp6f ;j]{If0f ul/Psf] cj:yfg lu|8 ju{ -%) ls=ld × %) ls=ld=_ sf]
aflx/ k5{ h;df cf]ul6Psf] cj:yfg k5{ eg] vf; lu|8 ju{sf ;+Vof a:t'sf]
;+Vofsf] dfly n]Vg'k5{ .
xf]l;of/k"j{s gfKg'xf];\ t/ w]/} lj:tf/} xf]Og . 5f]6f] cjlwleq k|To]s ;]6
;dfKt ug]{ sf]lzz ug'{xf];\ ha xfjfkflgsf] cj:yf / pHHjntfsf] cj:yf
kl/jt{g geO{ /x]sf] 5 .
olb s'g} ;]6 cyjf ;]6x? /2 ul/Psf 5g\ lsgls ltgLx? ;Ldfx?eGbf aflx/
5g\ cyjf x? s'g} sf/0fjz o;nfO{ gkm\of+Sg'xf];\ . Pp6f wsf]{ dfq tfGg';\
/ æ/2 ul/Psf]Æ n]Vgf];\ / olb ;+ej 5 eg] /2 x'g'sf] sf/0f n]v\g';\ . ta of]
/2 ePsf ;j]{If0fx? /fd|f] rflx+df uf:g'; / k|fljlws zfvfdf u0fgfsf] nflu
a'emfpg'xf];\ . /2 ul/Psf ;j]{If0fx?n] klg s]xL uNtLx? kQf nufpg dbt
ug]{ / s]xL ;d:ofx? ;'Nemfpg ;S5 .
;j]{Ifsn] b]a|] df]x8f / bflxg] df]x8fsf dWodfgx?, ltgLx?sf] R.O. df
kl/jt{g / ;]6x?sf] dWodfgx? u0fgf ug'{k5{ .

153
8.13 Vertical Angles
A vertical angle is an angle between the horizontal and a line above
or below the horizontal. The elevation (+) is the angle between the
horizontal and the line above the horizontal while the depression (-)
is the angle between the horizontal and the line below the horizontal.
To eliminate the possibility of recording an elevation instead of a
depression and vice versa theodolites are now made with different
settings of zero on the vertical circle. A new expression "the zenithal
angle" was developed, which is measured from the zenith towards
the observed object. Zero is placed in zenith and all angles vary
between 0g and 200g. There is now no need to use + or - to distinguish
between elevation or depression.

ZENITH
0g

100g HORIZONTAL

fig. 62

In the case of zenithal angle all angles smaller than 100g are angles of
elevation while all angles larger than 100g are angles of depression.
The setting of zero on the vertical circle varies between different
types of theodolite.

154
*=!# cg'nDa sf]0fx?
;dtn / ;dtnsf] dfly jf tnsf] /]vfsf] aLrsf] sf]0f cg'nDa sf]0f xf] .
;dtn / ;dtndflysf] /]vfsf] aLrsf] sf]0f ;df]Rr sf]0f -±_ xf] ha
ls ;dtn / ;dtn d'lgsf] /]vfsf] aLrsf] sf]0f ;df]lgRr sf]0f -—_ xf] .
;df]Rrsf] ;§f ;df]lgRr / 7Ls pN6f n]lvg] ;+efjgf x6fpg cg'nDj j[Qdf
æh]/f]Æ sf] ljleGg ldnfpg];lxtsf] lyof]8f]nfO6x? ca agfOG5g\ . Pp6f
gof+ jfSo ævdWofGt/ sf]0fÆ sf] ;[hgf ePsf] lyof], h'g vdWoaf6 ;j]{If0f
ul/Psf] j:t'lt/ gflkG5 . ;'Ggf vdWodf /flvG5 / ;a} sf]0fx? 0 ug /
@)) ugsf] aLrdf km/s kb}{hfG5 . olb of] ;df]Rr cyjf ;df]lgRr xf] eGg]
km/s b]vfpg ± cyjf — ca k|of]u ug{ kb}{g .

lz/f] ljGb'
0g

100g If}lts

lrq ^@

vdWofGt/ sf]0fdf !)) ugeGbf sdsf] ;a} sf]0fx? ;df]Rr sf]0fx? x'g\ ha
ls !)) ugeGbf a9L ePsf] ;a} sf]0fx? ;df]lgRr sf]0fx? x'g\ . cg'nDa
j[qdf ;'Ggf ldnfpg] ljleGg k|sf/sf] lyof]8f]nfO6df km/s km/s x'G5 .

155
Wild T2 and T16 theodolites
The vertical circle of wild T 2 and T 16 theodolites is set with
0g towards zenith and 100g (face left) and 300g (face right)
horizontally.

fig. 63
Wild T 3 theodolite
The vertical circle of T 3 theodolite has a different arrangement.
The whole vertical circle is divided into 200g instead of 400g. That

fig. 64

156
ljN8 T2 / T16 lyof]8f]nfO6x?
ljN8 T2 / T16 lyof]8f]nfO{6x?sf] cg'nDa j[t vdWolt/ 0 ug / !)) ug
-b]a|] df]x8f_ / #)) ug -bflxg] df]x8f_ ;dtnlt/ ldnfOPsf] 5 .

lrq ^#
ljN8 T3 lyof]8f]nfO6
T3 lyof]8f]nfO6sf] cg'nDa j[t leGg} k|aGwsf] 5 . k"/f cg'nDa j[Q $))
ugsf] ;§fdf @)) ugdf efu nufOPsf] 5 . To;sf] dtnj xf] ls T3

lrq ^$
157
means that the value of 1g for the vertical circle of the T 3 theodolite
has the value 2g. For face left the graduation is 150g towards zenith,
100g horizontally and 50g towards nadir while face right show 50g
towards zenith, 100g horizontally and 150g towards nadir.
8.131 Measuring vertical angles
The target is sighted first in face left position so that the horizontal
crosshair and the target image coincide. After the bubble of the
vertical circle index level has been centred the first face left reading
can be done. Then move the telescope and the index bubble a little
away and coincide again and centre the bubble again giving a second
reading in face left. Do the same (two readings) in face right and
turn to the next object. To compensate for possible error (oblique
position) in the horizontal crosshair we sight first (for both readings
in the same face) on the target of the object symmetrically left and
right of the vertical crosshair and as near as possible to the centre of
the reticule.

1st AND 2nd READING

OF THE SAME FACE

fig. 65

When both readings of face left and both readings of face right are
finished the mean of the face left readings and the mean of the face
right readings should be done. The sum (face left mean + face right
mean) serves as a check. The sum should be about 400g for T 2 and
T 16 theodolites (see appendix F) and 200g for T 3 theodolites (see
appendix G). Deviations from 400g and 200g respectively should be
- if the observer is experienced - constant for all zenithal angles at
one station.

158
lyof]8f]nfO6 cg'nDa j[qdf ! ug dfgsf] @ ug dfg x'g]5 . b]a|] df]x8fsf nflu
c+zfÍg !%) ug vdWolt/ x'G5, !)) ug ;dtnlt/ / %) ug cwf]ljGb'lt/
ha ls bflxg] df]x8f %) ug vdWolt/, !)) ug ;dtnlt/ / !%) ug
cwf]ljGb'lt/ .
*=!#! cg'nDa sf]0fx? gfKg]
b]a|] df]x8fsf l:yltdf klxnf lgzfg lrGxnfO{ x]l/G5 tfls ;dtnLo qm; x]P/
/ lgzfg lrGxsf] k|ltlaDa;+u hf]l8G5 . Ps k6s cg'nDa j[Q cg'qmdl0fsf
;dtn ;"rssf] aannfO{ s]lGb|t u/L ;s]kl5 k|yd b]a|] df]x8fsf] l/l8ª
ug{ ;lsG5 . ta 6]ln:sf]knfO{ / cg'qmdl0fsf aannfO{ clnslt ;fg'{;\ /
km]l/ hf]8\g';\ / km]/L aannfO{ b]a|] df]x8fdf bf];|f] l/l8ª lbg s]lGb|t ug'{xf];\ .
bflxg] df]x8fdf p:t} ug'{xf];\ -b'O{ j6f l/l8ªx?_ / csf]{ lgzfg lrGxdf hfg';\ .
;dtnLo qm; x]P/df ;+efljt cz'4tf -jfËf] l:ylt_ sf] Ifltk"lt{sf] nflu
xfdLn] k|yd -pxL df]x8fsf b'a} l/l8ªx?sf] nflu_ cg'nDa qm; x]P/sf]
b]a|] / bflxg] oyfqmd ePdf j:t'sf lgzfgnfO{ nIo ub{5f}+ / ;+ej eP;Dd
/]l6s"nsf] s]Gb|sf] glhs .

Tolx df]x8fsf]
klxnf] / bf];|f] ;e]{If0f

lrq ^%
ha b]a|] df]x8fsf] b'a} l/l8ªx? / bflxg] df]x8fsf] b'a} l/l8ªx? ;dfKt
x'G5g\, b]a|] df]x8fsf] l/l8ªx?sf] dWodfg / bflxg] df]x8fsf] l/l8ªx?sf]
dWodfg lgsfNg'k5{ . hf]8 -b]a|] df]x8f dWodfg ± bflxg] df]x8f dWodfg_ sf]
u0fgfn] hf+rsf] sfd ug]{5 . To; hf]8 s/Lj $)) ug T2 sf] nflu / T16
lyof]8f]nfO6sf] nflu -kl/lzi6 F x]g'{;\_ / @)) ug T3 lyof]8f]nfO6sf] nflu
-kl/lzi6 G x]g'{;\_ x'g'kb{5 . qmdzM $)) ug / @)) ugaf6 cltqmdx? olb
159
The readings have to be booked in the observation book for zenithal
angles (TRIG. FORM 1.12), only. Do not forget to record the part of
the target which was sighted (top of the upper pyramid, red - white
line of the rod between the pyramids, etc) by means of a small sketch
of the target at the object with a small arrow. It is also necessary to
record the height of theodolite and the height of the signal both with
reference to the centre mark of the station.
Note : Measure zenithal angles in the third order and in major fourth
order framework only. In the cadastral fourth order framework
zenithal angles are measured only between such stations
where the distance was or will be measured by geodimeter.
The best time for measuring the zenithal angles is about
midday when the refraction is at its smallest.

8.2 Observation of distances

The measurement of distances is necessary in traversing or in using
the method "bearing and distance" or in measuring eccentricity. For
any precise distance measurement only slope distances are measured.
There are two methods used in the Trigonometrical Division :
- with a steel tape
- with geodimeter.
8.21 Measuring with steel tape
Steel tapes 20 or 100 metres long are used depending upon the
distance to be measured. Both ends of the steel tape must be held

fig. 66
160
;j]{Ifs cg'ejL 5 eg] Ps cj:yfgdf ;a} vdWofGt/ sf]0fx?sf l:y/ x'g'
kb{5 . l/l8ªx? (TRIG. FORM 1.12) vdWofGt/ sf]0fx?sf] nflu ;a]{If0f
k'l:tsfdf dfq n]Vg'k5{ . j:t'sf] lgzfgsf] efu h'g ;fgf] tL/n] - _ j:t'df
lgzfgsf] ;fgf] k|f?k -dflyNnf] lk/fld8sf] 6'Kkf, lk/fld8x?sf] aLrdf /8sf]
/ftf] / ;]tf]wsf{n] OToflb _ h'g tLvf] agfOPsf] lyof] /]s8{ ug{ ge'Ng'xf];\ .
cj:yfgsf] s]lGb|o lrGxsf] lgb]{zdf b'a} lgzfg lrGxsf] pFrfO{ / lyof]8f]nfO6sf]
pFrfO{ klg /]s8{ ug'{ h?/L 5 .
l6Kk0fL M vdWofGt/ sf]0fx? t];|f] bhf{ / d'Vo rf}yf] bhf{sf] cfwf/ /rgfdf
dfq gfKg'xf];\ . rf}yf] bhf{sf] cfwf/ /rgfdf To:tf cj:yfgx?sf]
aLrdf dfq vdWofGt/ sf]0fx? gflkG5g\ h;df b"/L lhof]8f]ld6/n]
gflkPsf] lyof] cyjf gflkg] 5 .
vdWofGt/ sf]0fx? gfKg] ;aeGbf /fd|f] ;do lbgsf] !@ ah]lt/ xf]
h'ga]nf k/fj[lQ sd;]sd x'g]5 .
*=@ b"/Lx?sf] ;j]{If0f
b"/Lx?sf] gfk 6«fel;{u jf t/Lsf ælbs\ l:ylt / b"/LÆ sf] k|of]usf] nflu cyjf
pTs]Gb|tfsf] gfksf] nflu h?/L 5 . s'g} kl/z'4 b"/Lsf] gfksf] nflu le/fnf]
b"/Lx? dfq gflkG5 . lqsf]0fldtLo zfvfdf b"/L gfKg] b'O{ t/Lsfx? 5g\ M
— l:6n 6]kåf/f
— lhof]8f]ld6/åf/f
*=@! l:6n 6]k4f/f gfKg]
b"/Lsf] nDafO{df e/ k/L @) ld6/ / !)) ld6/sf] l:6n 6]kx? k|of]u ul/G5g\ .
l:6n 6]ksf] b'a} clGtdf+zx? 7ØfSs} Ps} /]vfdf kg]{u/L ;dfTg' k5{ . olb

lrq ^^
161
exactly in line. If one steel tape length is not sufficient the distance
must be subdivided into several sections all of which must be
shorter than steel tape length. To keep all the sections exactly in line
is not easy. The best way is to set out several wooden pegs using
a theodolite and then drive them firmly into ground. The intervals
between the pegs should be such that the steel tape will stretch
between them without touching the ground or any other obstacle,
see fig.66. Hammer a small nail into the top of each wooden peg
using the theodolite to align the nails exactly.

8.211 Method by levelling

This method is used mainly in a gentle sloping terrain.
First measure the slope distance from peg to peg and book it in the
observation book for horizontal angles (TRIG. FORM 1.11). Measure
each distance three times. For the first measurement hold the zero
mark of the steel tape at the centre mark of the station (or at the nail
of the first peg). Then slowly stretch the tape to the nail on the first
peg (or on the second peg, etc). Do not touch the theodolite at the
station or the nail on the wooden peg. Read off the measurement and
book it. Then move the steel tape back wards and instead of at zero
hold the tape at some round number of centimetres (e.g. 0.170m),
stretch the steel tape and read off the measurement (e.g. 9.890m).

fig. 67

162
Ps 6]ksf] nDafO{n] ck"/f] 5 eg] b"/LnfO{ w]/} v08x?df efu nufpg' k5{
h;df ltgLx? ;a} l:6n 6]ksf] nDafO{eGbf 5f]6f] x'g'k5{ . ;a} v08x?
b"/Lsf] Pp6} /]vfdf kfg'{ Toltsf] ;lhnf] sfd x}g . ;aeGbf c;n t/Lsf
lyof]8f]nfO6åf/f w]/} sf7sf lsnfx? ldnfpg] / ltgLx?nfO{ dha"tl;t
hdLg d"lg uf8\g' xf] . ;a} sf7sf sLnfx?sf] aLrdf o:tf] /fVg'k5{ ls l:6n
6]ksf] nDafO{ ltgLx?sf] aLrsf] k|To]snfO{ k'Ug] / l:6n 6]kn] e"O{ cyjf s'g}
5]sfj6nfO{ slxn] klg g5'g] x'g]5 lrq ^^ x]g'{;\ . oL lsnfx? lyof]8f]nfO6
k|of]u u/]/ km]l/ 7ØfSs} Ps} /]vfdf k+lQma4 u/]/ k|To]s sf7sf] sLnfsf]
6'Kkfdf Pp6f ;fgf] sLnf 7f]Sg';\ .
*=@!! ;dtng t/Lsfn]
of] t/Lsf vf; u/]/ cln cln le/fnf] hdLgdf k|of]u ul/G5 .of] t/Lsf k|yd
sLnfb]lv sLnf;Dd le/fnf] b"/L gfKgf];\ / (TRIG FORM 1.11) ;dtnLo
sf]0fx?sf] nflu ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfdf o;nfO{ l6Kgf];\ . k|To]s b"/L tLg
k6s gfKgf];\ . klxn] gfksf] nflu l:6n 6]ksf] ;'Ggf lrGx cj:yfgsf]
s]lGb|o lrGxdf ;dfTgf];\ -cyjf klxnf sf7sf] sLnfsf] sLnfdf_ . ta lj:tf/}
6]k klxnf] sf7sf] sLnfdf tfGgf];\ -cyjf bf];|f] sLnfdf OToflb_ . cj:yfgdf
cyjf sf7sf] sLnfsf] sLnfdf lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{ g5'g'xf];\ . gfk k9\gf];\ /
o;nfO{ l6Kg'xf];\ . ta l:6n 6]knfO{ k5fl8lt/ x6fpg'xf];\ / ;'Ggfsf] ;§fdf
;]G6Lld6/sf] s'g} k"/f ;+Vofdf -pbfx/0fsf] nflu )=!&) ld6/_ ;dfTg'xf];\ /
l:6n 6]knfO{ lvRg';\ / gfk k9\g'xf];\ -pbfx/0fsf] nflu (=*() ld6/_ .

lrq ^&

163
Book both - that is the reading at the station (or at the first peg, etc)
and the reading at the first peg (or at the second peg, etc). Subtract
the first from the second reading and book the result (e.g) 9.870m
- 0.170m = 9.700m). Repeat similarily for the third measurement
but move the zero further back until even the metre will change
(e.g. 1.840m). Then mean all three final measurements. All readings
must be booked in the observation book, even the substractions, see
fig.67. Next find the differences in height between each two points
of the divided distance (between the station and the first wooden
peg, between the first and the second wooden pegs, etc), using the
theodolite as a levelling instrument. Always place the theodolite
approximately halfway and in line between two points of the divided
distance. Adjust the index level bubble and set the vertical circle
exactly at 100g. Read the height over both points using 2 or 3 metre
steel tape as a staff. All booking should be recorded in a sketch
corresponding to the situation in field.
8.212 Method by zenithal angles
This method is used mainly in steep sloping terrain.
First measure the slope distance as described above, paragraph
8.211. Then measure the height of the theodolite over the station (or

fig. 68

164
b'a} l6Kg'xf];\ — Tof] xf] klxnf] cj:yfgsf] l/l8ª -cyjf klxnf] sLnfdf OToflb_
/ klxnf] sLnfdf l/l8ª -cyjf bf];|f] lsnfdf OToflb_ . klxnf] l/l8ª bf];|f];+u
36fpg'xf];\ - pbfx/0fsf] nflu (=*&) ld6/ — )=!&) ld6/ = (=&)) ld6/_ .
o:t} k|sf/n] t];|f] gfk bf]x/Øfpg'xf];\ t/ ;'Ggf ld6/eGbf a9L kl/jt{g x'g]
u/L k5fl8lt/ ;fg'{xf];\ -pbfx/0fsf] nflu !=*$) ld6/_ . ta tLg clGtd
gfkx?sf] dWodfg lgsfNg' xf];\ . ;a} l/l8ªx? ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfdf l6Kg'k5{,
36fpx? klg, lrq ^& x]g'{; . ta efu nufOPsf] b"/Lsf] k|To]s b'O{ ljGb"x?sf]
aLrsf] prfO{sf] cjz]if lgsfNg' xf];\ -cj:yfg / klxnf sf7sf] sLnfsf] aLr,
klxnf] / bf];|f] sf7sf] sLnfsf] aLr OToflb_ . o;sf] nflu lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{
;dtng pks/0fsf] ?kdf k|of]u ugf]{;\ . ;Fw} lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{ cGbfhL dfemdf
/ efu nufOPsf] b"/Lsf] b'O{ ljGb"x?sf] aLrsf /]vfdf /fVgf];\ . cg'qmdl0fsf
;dtng aannfO{ ldnfpg' xf];\ / cg'nDa j[QnfO{ 7ØfSs} !)) ugdf /fVg';\ .
@ cyjf # ld6/ l:6n 6]k :6fkm h:t} k|of]u u/]/ b'a} ljGb"x?dflysf] prfO{
k9\gf];\ . ;a} l6Kg] sfd Pp6f k|f?kdf ug'{k5{ h'g If]qsf] cj:yf;+u cg'?k
x'g'k5{ .
*=@!@ vdWofGt/ sf]0f t/Lsfn]
vf; u/]/ of] t/Lsf Psbd le/fnf] hdLgdf k|of]u ul/G5 .
klxn] dfly j0f{g ul/P h:t} k|yd le/fnf] b"/L gflkG5 cg'R5]b *=@!! . To;kl5

lrq ^*

165
over the first wooden peg, etc) and book it in the observation book.
Then measure the zenithal angle by sighting on the top of the nail at
the first wooden peg (or second wooden peg, etc). Book the reading.
All booking should be recorded in a sketch corresponding to the
situation in the field, see fig.68.
8.22 Measuring by geodimeter
At present there are three types of this electro - optic distance
measurer in the Trigonometrical Division :
- AGA geodimeter 76 ..... for distance up to 4km
- AGA geodimeter 6A ..... for distance up to 25km
- AGA geodimeter 8 ..... for distance up to 60km or more
in very good weather conditions.
When measuring with geodimeter the instrument is centred over one
station and the reflection prisms centrically over the other station.
The distance measured is that between the instrument and the prisms.
The geodimeter transmits a light beam towards the reflecting prisms
which reflect the light beam back to the geodimeter.
The geodimeter is able to measure the distance the light beam had to
travel. This is so in the case of the AGA geodimeter 76 where after
accurate sighting a touch on a button marked "measure" is necessary.
Within a few seconds the distance can be read on the display. In
the case of AGA geodimeter 6A and 8 the procedure is more
complicated. The measurement must be done in four frequencies,
with four sightings towards the reflecting prisms and a total of 32
readings on the delay scale, see appendix H. From these readings
the distance must be calculated using the tables, see appendixes I
and J. The air temperature and the air pressure must also be read at
both ends of the observed distance and the height of the geodimeter
and the height of the reflection prisms recorded. All these data, with
the readings, must be booked in the observation book TRIG. FORM
1.13, see appendix H.
Note: Direct visibility between the two stations to be measured is
necessary.

166
cj:yfg dflysf] lyof]8f]nfO6sf] prfO{ gfKgf];\ - cyjf klxnf] sf7sf] sLnfdfly
OToflb_ / o;nfO{ ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfdf l6Kgf];\ . ta klxnf] sf7sf] sLnfdf
sLnfsf] 6'Kkfdf nIo u/]/ vdWofGt/ sf]0f gfKg'xf];\ -cyjf bf];|f] sf7sf]
sLnf OToflb_ . l/l8ª l6Kg'xf];\ . ;a} l6Kg] sfd Pp6f k|f?kdf ug'{ k5{ h'g
If]qsf] cj:yf;+u cg'?k x'g'k5{ -lrq ^* x]g'{;\_ .
*=@@ lhof]8f]ld6/n] gfKg]
lqsf]0fldtLo zfvfdf xfn tLg k|sf/sf æOn]S6«f] – clK6sÆ b"/L gfKg] 5g\ M
— P=lh=P= lhof]8f]ld6/ &^ ========= $ ls=ld= tssf] b"/Lx?sf] nflu
— P=lh=P= lhof]8f]ld6/ ^ P ========= @% ls=ld= tssf] b"/Lx?sf] nflu
— P=lh=P= lhof]8f]ld6/ * ========== ^) ls=ld= tssf] b"/Lx?sf] nflu
cyjf w]/} /fd|f] xfjfkfgLsf
cj:yfdf cem a9L .
ha lhof]8f]ld6/n] gfKbf To; pks/0fnfO{ Ps cj:yfgdfly s]lGb|t ul/G5
/ k|ltlalDat ug]{ ;dkfZj{ -lk|hdx?_ csf]{ cj:yfgsf] dfly s]lGb|t ul/G5 .
gflkPsf] b"/L pks/0f / ;dkfZj{aLrdf x'G5 . lhof]8f]ld6/n] k|sfzsf] ls/0f
k|ltljDa ug]{ ;dkfZj{x? tkm{ k7fpF5 h;n] k|sfzsf] ls/0fnfO{ k|ltlaDj
u/]/ lhof]8f]ld6/tkm{ lkmtf{ ul//x]sf] x'G5 .
ta lhof]8f]ld6/ cfkm}n] k|sfzsf] ls/0f eP/ hfg] nDafO{sf] b"/L u0fgf u5{ .
P=lh=P= lhof]8f]ld6/ &^ df 7ØfSs} of] x'G5 h;df z'4tfk"j{s nIo
ul/;s]kl5 ægfKg] Æ j6gnfO{ 5'g' dfq cfjZos x'g]5 . To;kl5 s]xL
;]s]08leq g} b"/L æl8:Kn]Æ df k9\g ;lsG5 . P=lh=P= lhof]8f]ld6/ ^ P
/ * df sfo{ k|0ffnL a9L hl6n 5 . gfk rf/a6f lgTotfx?df ug'{k5{ .
k|ltlaDa ug]{ ;dkfZj{x?lt/ rf/ rf]l6 ;lxt / l8n] :s]ndf hDdf #@
l/l8ªx?, kl/lzi6 H x]g'{;\ . oL ;a} l/l8ªx?af6 tflnsfx?åf/f b"/L u0fgf
ug'{k5{, kl/lzi6 I / J x]g'{;\ . xfjfsf] tfkqmd / xfjfsf] rfk ;j]{If0f ul/Psf]
b'j} 7fpFdf k9\g'k5{ / lhof]8f]ld6/sf] prfO{ / k|ltljDa ug]{ ;dkfZj{x?sf]
prfO{gfKg' kb{5 . l/l8ªx?;lxtsf] oL ;a} tYof+s ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf TRIG.
FORM 1.13 df l6Kg'kb{5, kl/lzi6 H x]g'{;\ .
l6Kk0fL M gfKg'kg]{ b'O{ cj:yfgx?aLr 5n+{u b]lvg h?/L 5 .
167
 At the same time as the slope distances are measured by
geodimeter the zenithal angles between the two stations must
also be measured in order to reduce the slope distances to
horizontal.
Geodimeters are operated only by the Special Trigonometrical
survey Teams. Therefore if a geodimeter is required the
request for its use must be submitted through Group to HQ
with full details (location of distance, approach, if zenithal
angles already completed, etc).

8.3 Checking the position of signals

Whenever an observer visits a station where a signal is erected he
must always check the position of the signal. This means that even
if the observer is coming only to dismantle a signal when it is no
longer required for observation. The position of each signal (beacon,
tower, etc) must be checked using a theodolite. Set up the theodolite
about 5 - 10 metres away from the station, level it and point it in
the face left position at the centre of the signal head (the middle
of the red - white boundary line), see fig. 53 in chapter 6. Then tilt
the telescope vertically down at the top of the pillar of the station.
Instruct the chainman to make two marks by pencil or by ball-point

CROSSING POINT

fig. 69

168
 ha lhof]8f]ld6/n] b"/Lx? gflkG5g\ To;} a]nf To; b'O{ cj:yfgx? aLrsf]
vdWofGt/ sf]0fx? klg gfKg'kb{5 lsgls le/fnf] b"/Lx? ;dtn b"/Lx?df
kl/jt{g ug{sf nflu of] h?/L 5 .
lhof]8f]ld6/x? ljz]if lqsf]0fldtLo ;j]{If0f 6f]nLx?n] rnfpF5g\ .
To;sf/0f olb lhof]8f]ld6/sf] h?/t 5 eg] k"/f ljj/0f;lxt u|'kdfkm{t
s]Gb|nfO{ o;sf] nflu cg'/f]w u/]sf] a'emfpg'kb{5 -b"/Lsf] l:ylt, s;/L
k'Ug], olb vdWofGt/ sf]0fx? klxn]g} k"/f ul/;s]sf] 5 OToflb_ .
*=# lgzfg lrGxsf] l:ylt hf+Rg]
h'g;'s} sf/0fn] klg ;j]{Ifs Tof] cj:yfgdf, hxfF lgzfg lrGx ufl8Psf] 5,
uO/x]sf] 5 eg] p;n] lgzfg lrGxsf] l:ylt ;+w} hf+Rg'kb{5 . To;sf] dtnj ha
;j]{If0fsf] nflu o;sf] h?/L 5}g olb ;j]{Ifsn] lgzfg lrGx lemSg cfO/x]sf]
5 tfklg lyof]8f]nfO6 k|of]u u/]/ k|To]s lgzfg lrGx cyjf a]sg, 6fj/
OToflbsf] l:ylt hf+Rg'kb{5 . lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{ cj:yfgsf] s/La %–!) ld6/
k/ v8f ugf]{;\, ;dtng ug'{;, lgzfg lrGxsf] 6fpsf]sf] s]Gb|nfO{ -/ftf]–;]tf]
;Ldf /]vfsf] aLr_ b]a|] df]x8f l:yltdf nIo ug'{;\, cWofo ^ df lrq %# x]g'{;\ .
To;kl5 cj:yfgsf lkn/sf] 6'Kkf]df cg'nDatfsf] ;fy 6]ln:sf]k em'sfpg'xf];\ .

lrq ^(

169
pen on the top of the pillar (close and remote ends of the top of the
pillar) exactly in the line with the vertical crosshair. Then turn the
telescope to face right position and point to the centre rod of the
head of the signal and mark this position also with two marks at
the top of the pillar. If there is any difference between face left and
face right position mean the distances between those two points each
(close end - 2 points, remote end - 2 points) and join them by a line
(see fig. 69). Change the position of the theodolite by about 100g
and set it up again, level it and point to the signal head in face left.
Turn the telescope down at the top of the pillar and mark the line by
two points. Do the same in face right and if there is any difference
between the face left and face right markings mean them and join
by a line.

The crossing point of the meaned lines is the projected centre of

the signal (target) onto the top of the pillar. Measure how far this
projected point is from the centre of the station mark. If the projected
centre of the signal is less than 20mm from the centre of the station
mark no further measurement is necessary and the signal should
be considered as centric. Nevertheless all the information must be
entered in the head in the observation book with the remark "target
centric", as seen in appendix K. If the projected centre of the signal
(target) is more than 20mm from the centre of the station mark the
distance "e" (eccentricity) and the bearing must be measured. The
distance must be measured by steel tape, the bearing by theodolite
with reference to 2-3 objects (stations) measured in two sets, see
appendix L.
If an observer goes to the station to perform the observation and finds
the signal (target) out of the centre he has to include the readings to
the target in his observation. After finding the projected centre of the
signal (target) he will project it in the terrain at some distance (to
enable him to focus on it). He will then include the target readings
in only two sets of his observation, booking it as last object, as seen
in appendix M.

170
lkn/sf] lz/df -lkn/sf] 6'Kkf]sf] glhs / 6f9f 5]px?_ 7ØfSs} cg'nDa
qm; x]P/sf] /]vfdf h+lh/bf/nfO{ k]lG;n jf 86 k]gn] b'O{ j6f lrGxx?
agfpg lgb]{zg lbg';\ . ta 6]ln:sf]k bflxg] df]x8fdf 3'dfpg'xf];\ / lgzfg
lrGxsf] 6fpsf]sf] s]lGb|o /8nfO{ nIo ug'{xf];\ / lkn/sf] 6'Kkf]df b'O{ j6f
lrGx x?n] km]l/ lrGx nufpg'xf];\ . olb b]a|] df]x8f / bflxg] df]x8f l:yltdf s'g}
cjz]if 5 eg] k|To]s -glhssf] @ ljGb"x?, 6f9fsf] @ ljGb"x?_ . tL b'O{ ljGb'x?sf]
larsf] b"/Lx?sf] dWodfg lgsfNg'xf]';\, / Ps /]vfn] hf]8g'; -lrq ^( x]g'{;\_ .
lyof]8f]nfO{6sf] l:ylt sl/j !)) ugn] kl/jt{g ug'{;\ / o:nfO{ km]/L v8f
ug'{xf];\, ;dtng ugf]{;\ / b]a|] df]x8fdf lgzfg lrGxsf] lz/df nIo ug'{;\ .
lkn/sf] 6'Kkf]df 6]ln:sf]k tnlt/ 3'dfpg'xf];\ / /]vfnfO{ b'O{ ljGb'n] lrGxf]
nufpg'xf];\ . bflxg] df]x8fdf klg p:t} ugf]{;\ / olb b]a|]df]x8f / bflxg]
df]x8fsf] lrGxx?df s'g} cjz]if 5 eg] ltgLx?sf] dWodfg lgsfNg';\ / Pp6f
/]vfn] hf]8\g';\ .
dWodfg lgsflnPsf] /]vfx?sf] sfl6Psf] ljGb' g} lkn/sf] 6'Kkfdf k|na+ g ul/Psf]
lgzfg lrGxsf] s]Gb| xf] . cj:yfgsf] s]lGb|o ljGb'eGbf of] k|na+ g ul/Psf] ljGb'
slt 6f9f 5 gfKgf];\ . olb k|na+ g ul/Psf] lgzfg lrGxsf] s]Gb| cj:yfg lrGxsf]
s]Gb|af6 @) ld=ld= eGbf sd 5 eg] c¿ s'g} gfksf] h¿/L 5}g / To; lgzfg
lrGxnfO{ s]lGb|t 5 eg]/ ljrf/ ug'k{ 5{ . t/ klg ;a} ;"rgf ;j]I{ f0f k'l:tsfsf]
lz/df / s}lkmot ;lxt ælgzfg lrGx s]lGb|tÚÚ kl/lzi6 K df b]vfP em}+ ug'k{ b{5 .
olb k|na+ g ul/Psf] lgzfg lrGxsf] s]Gb| cj:yfg lrGxsf] s]Gb|af6 @) ld=ld=
eGbf a9L 5 eg] b'/L æeÚÚ -pTs]Gb|tf_ / lbs\ l:ylt gfKg'kb{5 . b"/L :6Ln6]kn]
gfKg'kb{5 / b'O{ ;]6x¿df gfkLPsf] @–# j:t'x¿ cyjf cj:yfgx¿sf] lgb]z { df
lyof]8f]nfO6n] lbs\ l:ylt kl/lzi6 L x]g; {' \ .
olb ;j]{Ifs cj:yfglt/ ;j]{If0f ug{ uPsf] 5 eg] / lgzfg lrGx s]Gb|af6
aflx/ k¥of] eg] pGn] p:sf] ;j]{If0fdf lgzfg lrGxnfO{ l/l8ªx¿ leqkfg]{5 .
lgzfg lrGxsf k|n+ag ul/Psf] s]Gb| kfPkl5 pGn] o:nfO{ s]lx b'/L k/ hldgdf
k|n+ag ug]{5 -pGnfO{ o:df kmf]s;\ ug{ ;lhnf]sf nflu_ . clGtd j:t' h:t}
lnP/ pGn] lgzfg lrGxsf] l/l8ªx¿ pGsf] ;j]{If0fsf] b'O{ ;]6x¿df dfq kfg]{5,
kl/lzi6 M x]g'{;\ .

171
Each Group must have a record of the height of all signals within its
area and at the end of the field season the Group must submit that
record to HQ, Technical Section.
8.4 Satellite stations
There are two kinds of satellite station (already described in paragraph 3.5).
8.41 Satellite stations in the chain or traverse of the same order
as the station from which the satellite station is established. For
example : first to first, second to second, third to third and fourth to
fourth order stations.

fig. 70

The use of this kind of satellite station requires three observations

(see fig. 70):
- the distance "e" (eccentricity) between the station and the
satellite station,
- the distance "d" between the station and another trigonometrical
station in the chain or traverse, measured by geodimeter,

172
k|To]s ;d"x;+u o:sf] If]q leqsf] ;a} lgzfg lrGxx¿sf] prfO{sf] /]s8{ x'gk' 5{ /
If]qLo l;hgsf] cGtdf ;d"xn] To; /]s8{ s]Gb|, k|fljlws zfvfdf a'emfpg'k5{ .
*=$ pk cj:yfg
b'O{ k|sf/sf pk cj:yfg x'G5g\ -cg'R5]b #=% df cufl8 g} j0f{g ul/P em}_+ .
*=$! pxL bhf{sf h+lh/ cyjf 6«fe;{df pk cj:yfg h;sf] cj:yfg g} pk
cj:yfgaf6 :yflkt ul/G5 . h:t}M k|ydaf6 k|yd, bf];|f]af6 bf];|f], t];|f]af6
t];|f] / rf}yf]af6 rf}yf] cj:yfgx¿ .

lrq &)
o:tf] k|sf/sf pk cj:yfgx¿ k|of]u ug{ oL tLg ;j]{If0fx¿sf] h¿/L 5
-lrq &) x]g'{;\_ M
– cj:yfg / pk cj:yfg aLrsf] b"/L æeÚÚ -pTs]Gb|tf_,
– cj:yfg / csf]{ lhof]8f]ld6/n] gfk]sf] h+lh/ 6«fe;{df lqsf]0fldtLo
cj:yfg aLrsf] Pp6f b"/L ædÚÚ,
173
 - horizontal readings :
from the station – to the satellite station and to all
visible objects (as in the observation
diagram)
from the satellite station – to the station (centre) and to all visible
objects (as in the observation diagram).
At least two objects should be the
same as observed from the station.
All readings (observations) from the station and from the satellite
station must together cover all objects as in the observation diagram.
8.42 Satellite stations for chains or traverses of lower order than the
station from which the satellite station is established. For example
: satellite stations on first order stations for second, third and fourth
order stations. Or satellite stations on second order stations for third
and fouth order stations. Or satellite stations on third order stations
for fourth order stations.
To calculate this kind of satellite station two observations are needed
(see fig. 71) :
– the distance "e" (eccentricity) between the station and the
satellite station,
– horizontal readings :
from the station - to the satellite station and to
all visible objects (as in the
observation diagram) and at
least to two objects which are
of the same or higher order
stations (orientation),
from the satellite station - to the station (centre) and to
all visible objects (as in the
observation diagram) and
where at least two objects
should be the same as those
observed from the station.
All readings from the station and from the satellite station must
together cover all objects as in the observation diagram.

174
 – ;dtnLo l/l8ªx¿ M
cj:yfgaf6 — pk cj:yfgnfO{ / ;a} b]lvg] lgzfg lrGxx¿ -;j]{If0f
/]vf lrqdf h:t}_
pk cj:yfgaf6 — cj:yfgx¿nfO{ -s]Gb|_ / ;a} b]lvg] lgzfg lrGxx¿nfO{
-;j{I] f0f /]vf lrqdf h:t}_ sd;]sd b'O{ j6f lgzfg
lrGxx¿df cj:yfgaf6 ;j]I{ f0f ul/Psf h:t} pxL x'gk' 5{ .
cj:yfgaf6 / pk cj:yfgaf6 ;lxt ;a} l/l8ªx¿ -;j]{If0fx¿_ ;j]{If0f /]vf
lrqdf h:t} ;a} lgzfg lrGxx¿ EofPsf] x'g'k5{ .
*=$@ cj:yfgsf] eGbf tNnf] bhf{ h;af6 pk cj:yfg :yflkt ul/Psf] 5,
h+lh/ / 6«fe;{sf] nflu pk cj:yfg .
h:t}M bf];|f], t];|f] / rf}yf] bhf{sf] cj:yfgx¿sf nflu k|yd bhf{df pk cj:yfg .
cyjf t];|f] / rf}yf] bhf{ cj:yfgsf nflu bf];|f] bhf{sf] cj:yfgdf pk cj:yfg .
cyjf rf}yf] bhf{ cj:yfgsf] nflu t];|f] bhf{ cj:yfgdf pk cj:yfg .
o:tf] k|sf/sf] pk cj:yfg u0fgf ug{ oL b'O{ lsl;dsf ;j]{If0fx¿sf] h¿/L
5 -lrq &! x]g'{;\_ M
cj:yfg / pk cj:yfg aLrsf] b"/L æeÚÚ -pTs]Gb|tf_,
— ;dtnLo l/l8ªx¿ M
cj:yfgaf6 — pk cj:yfgnfO{ / ;a} b]lvg] j:t'x¿nfO{ -;j]I{ f0f /]vf
lrqdf h:t}_ h'g b]Vg ;lsg] 5g\ / sd;]sd b'O{ j:t'x¿
h'g pxL bhf{ cyjf dflyNnf] bhf{sf] cj:yfgx¿ 5g\
-cg':yfkgfsf] nflu_,
pk cj:yfgaf6 — cj:yfgnfO{ -s]Gb|_ / ;a} b]lvg] j:t'x¿nfO{ -;j]{If0f
/]vf lrqdf h:t}_ h'g b]lvg ;lsg] 5g\ / h;df
cj:yfgaf6 ;j]{If0f ePsf sd;]sd b'O{ j:t'x¿ pxL
x'g'kb{5 .
cj:yfgaf6 / pk cj:yfgaf6 ;lxt ;a} l/l8ªx¿ ;j]{If0f /]vf lrqdf h:t}
;a} lgzfg lrGxx¿ EofPsf] x'g'k5{ .
175
 fig. 71

8.43 Some remarks on satellite stations

The satellite station should also be observed from the other stations
when visible. In this way all surrounding triangles can be closed even
in the field and the observation confirmed good. When the satellite
station is more than 100 meteres from the station, distance “e” must
always be meassured by geodimeter only. Distances shorter than
100 meters can be measured by steel tape, see paragaraph 8.21.
When a satellite station is used as a fourth order station give the
satellite station the number of a fourth order station and record the
references for the satellite station in brackets following the number

176
 lrq &!

*=$# pk cj:yfgx¿nfO{ s]xL 6Lsf l6Kk0fLx¿

ha pk cj:yfg b]lvG5 c¿ cj:yfgaf6 klg ;j]{If0f ug'{k5{ . o;/L If]qdf
klg ;a} jl/kl/sf lqsf]0fx¿ ;+j[lto ug{ ;lsG5 / lglZrt ug{ ;lsG5 ls
;j]{If0f /fd|f] 5 . ha cj:yfgaf6 pk cj:yfg !)) ld6/eGbf a9L 5 b"/L
æeÆ ;+w} lhof]8f]ld6/ n] dfq gfKg'kb{5 . !)) ld6/eGbf 5f]6f] b"/Lx¿ l:6n
6]kx¿n] gfKg ;lsG5, cg'R5]b *=@! x]g'{;\ .
ha pk cj:yfg rf}yf] bhf{sf] cj:yfg h:t} k|of]u ul/G5 pk cj:yfgnfO{
rf}yf] bhf{sf] ;+Vof lbg'xf];\ / pbfx/0fdf h:t} rf}yf] bhf{sf] ;+Vof kl5 a|fs]6 leq

177
of the fourth order station, for example:
1493 (= 10 Sangle SS).
Always enter this information in the observation books and in the
description cards.
To avoid a mistake do not set up two signals (one for the station and
one for the satellite station) on the same hill at the same time. If it is
essential to use two signals at the same time reverse the colours for
the top pyramids, e.g. red for the station and white for the satellite
station or vice versa.

178
pk cj:yfgnfO{ lgb]{zx¿ n]Vg';\ M
!$(# -= !) ;+fun] P;=P;=_
;j]{If0f k'l:tsfx¿df / ljj/0f sf8{x¿df ;+w} oL ;"rgf n]Vg';\ .
uNtL x6fpgsf] nflu Ps} a]nf Pp6} 8f+8fdf b'O{ j6f lgzfg lrGxx¿ -Pp6f
cj:yfgsf] nflu / Pp6f pk cj:yfgsf] nflu_ k|of]u gug'{xf];\ . olb Ps}
a]nf b'O{ j6f lgzfg lrGx k|of]u ug{ cfj:os 5 eg] lk/fld8x¿sf] 6'Kkfsf]
nflu /ª pN6f /fVgf];\, pbfx/0fsf] nflu cj:yfgsf] nflu /ftf] / pk
cj:yfgsf] nflu ;]tf] cyjf 7Ls pN6f .

179
9. CARE ADJUSTMENT AND MAINTENANCE OF
THEODOLITES

While using a theodolite in the field it is necesary to check it from

time to time to see if it is functining correctly. Here is a check list.

9.11 Plate level

The theodolite must always be levelled before using it for observation.
Therefore it is essential that the plate level works properly. As
described is paragaraph 8.114, when one of the ends of the bubble
(after levelling up the theodolite) leaves the graduation scale of the
plate level the plate level must be adjusted by a trained person. The
procedure for the adjustment is as follows:
Certre the circular bubble by adjusting the footscrews and open the
horizontal clamp. Turn the alidade (rotatable part of the theodolite)
so that the plate level is parallel to the line joining any two footscrews
A, B, (see fig. 57). Centre the bubble by giving footscrews A,B
equal and opposite turns. Turn the alidade clockwise through 100g
and centre the bubble by adjusting footscrew C only. Then turn the
alidade through 200g (the plate level is in line with footscrew C but
in the reverse direction). The bubble should be in the centre of the
plate level graduation.
If it is not halve the deviation by bringing the bubble half way towards
the centre of the graduation scale (marked on the tube) by using the
adusting screw. The adjusting screw is located at the end of the plate
level housing. To move the adjusting screw use the adjusting pin
(tommy bar) supplied as an accessory with the theodolite.

180
(= lyof]8f]nfO6sf] htg, ldnfpg] / d/Ddt

ha lyof]8f]nfO6 If]qdf k|of]u ul/G5 olb lyof]8f]nfO6 7Ls 5 ls hfGg a]nf

a]nfdf o;nfO{ hf+Rg' h¿/L 5 . s]xL lgodx¿ 5g\ .
(=!! Kn]6 n]en
lyof]8f]nfO6 ;j]{If0fsf nflu k|of]u ug'{eGbf cufl8 ;+w} ;dtng ug'{k5{ .
To;sf/0f of] cfjZos 5 ls Kn]6 n]en plrt k|sf/n] sfd u5{ . cg'R5]b
*=!!$ df j0f{g ul/P h:t} ha aansf] 5]px¿sf] Pp6f -lyof]8f]nfO6
;dtng ul/;s]kl5_ Kn]6 n]ensf] c+zfÍgeGbf aflx/ cfpF5 Kn]6 n]en
tfnLd k|fKt dfG5]n] ldnfpg'k5{ . ldnfpg] sfo{ljlw lgDg lnlvt 5 M
v'§fsf k]rx¿ k|of]u u/]/ uf]nfsf/ aannfO{ s]lGb|t ug'{;\ / ;dtnLo RofKg]
vf]Ngf];\ . Pln8]8 -lyof]8f]nfO6sf] dflyNnf] 3'Dg] efu_ 3'dfpg';\ ls Kn]6
n]en s'g} b'O{ j6f v'§fx¿sf k]rx¿ A,B -lrq %& x]g'{;\_ n] hf]l8Psf] /]vf;+u
;dfGt/ 5 . v'§fsf k]rx¿ A,B j/fj/ / pN6f 3'dfP/ aannfO{ s]Gb|df
Nofpg'xf];\ . ta Pln8]8nfO{ !)) ugn] 3l8jt lbzfdf 3'dfpg'xf];\ / t];|f]
v'§fsf] k]r C nfO{ 3'dfP/ aannfO{ s]Gb|df Nofpg'xf];\ . ta Pln8]8 @))
ugn] 3'dfpg'xf];\ -ha;Dd Kn]6 n]en pxL v'§fsf] k]r C ;+u /]vfdf x'G5 t/
pN6f] lbzfdf_ aan cem;Dd klg Kn]6 n]en c+zfÍgsf] s]Gb|df x'g'k5{ .
-6Ø"jdf lrGx nufOPsf]_ olb 5}g eg] ldnfpg] k]råf/f aannfO{ c+zfÍgsf
s]Gb|lt/ cfwf NofP/ cltqmdnfO{ cfwf ug'{;\ . ldnfpg] k]r Kn]6 n]ensf]
3/sf] 5]pdf /flvPsf] x'G5 . ldnfpg] k]r rnfpg lyof]8f]nfO6;+u rflxg]
k"hf{sf] ¿kdf k7fOPsf] /8 k|of]u ug'{xf];\ .

181
Then move the bubble through the second half of the deviation by
bringing the bubble to the centre of its run with the footscrew C.
Then turn the theodolite clockwise through 100g . If the bubble is not
in centre of the graduation scale then halve the deviation by means of
the adjusting screw as described above and move the bubble through
the second half of the deivation by giving footscrews A,B equal
and opposite turns. Repeat this procedure until the bubble remains
constant in the center of the graduation scale of the plate level.

9.12 Collimation error

If, during observation, it is found that the face left and face
right readings of the theodolite differ by more than 2c (=0.0200g)
Groupleader must be informed. He will arrange for a trained
mechanic to come to adjust the theodolite immediately in camp or
Group will send the theodolite to HQ for the adjustment.

9.13 Index error

When measuring zenithal angles readings are checked by closing
on 400g for T2 and T16 theodolites and on 200g for T3 theodolite. If
the closure is not exactly 400g (or 200g) the difference is called the
index error.
Remember (as said in paragraph 8.131) that the deviation from 400g
and 200g respectively should be - if the observer is experienced -
constant for all zenithal angle at one station. When the closure is
different for one or more of the observed objects the observation
for this (or these) objects must be repeated. When the index error is
more than 5c (=0.0500g) the theodolite must be adjusted by a trained
mechanic.

9.14 Optical plumb bob

The optical plumb bob of the theodolite must be checked from time
to time. The best place to do this is inside a house where the air is
still (no wind). A small cross should be made on the floor by a ball-
point pen or pencil (or a small nail or pin could be used).

182
v'§fsf] k]r C åf/f aannfO{ o;sf] s]Gb|lt/ NofP/ bf];|f] cfwf x'g] u/L aan
lx+8fpg'xf];\ . ta lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{ 3l8jt\ lbzfdf !)) ugn] 3'dfpg'xf];\ .
olb aan c+zfsgsf] s]Gb|df 5}g eg] dfly j0f{g ul/P h:t} ldnfpg] k]rn]
cltqmdnfO{ cfwf ug{';\ / a/fa/ / pN6f] kl/qmdx?n] v'§fsf k]rx? A, B
3'dfP/ cltqmdsf bf];|f] x'g] u/L aan rnfpg'xf]; . Kn]6 n]ensf] c+zfÍgsf]
s]Gb|df aan ga;];Dd o; sfo{ljlwnfO{ bf]x/ofpg'xf]; .
(=!@ sf]lnd]zg cz'4tf
ha ;j]{If0f ul//x]sf] a]nf of] kfpF5 ls lyof]8f]nfO6sf] b]a|] df]x8f / bflxg]
df]x8fsf] l/l8ªx? @ l;= - = )=)@)) ug_ eGbf a9L km/s x'G5 eg] u|'k
g]tfnfO{ ;"lrt ug'{kb{5 . p;n] Joj:yf ug]{ 5 ls l;wf SofDkdf
lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{ ldnfpg] tflnd k|fKt d]sflgs cfpg] 5 cyjf u'|kn]
lyof]8f]nflO6nfO{ ldnfpgsf] nflu s]Gb|tkm{ k7fpg] 5 .
(=!# cg'qmdlgsf cz'4tf
ha vdWofGt/ sf]0fx? gflkG5g\ l/l8ªx? lyof]8f]nfO6 T2 / T16 sf] nflu
$)) ugsf] k"0f{tf hf+r ul/G5g\ / @)) ugdf lyof]8f]nfO6 T3 df .
olb k"0f{tf 7ØfSs} $)) ug -cyjf @)) ug_ 5}g eg] To; cjz]ifnfO{
cg'qmdl0fsf cz'4tf elgG5 .
:d/0f /xf];\ -cg'R5]b *=!#! df eg] h:t}_ ls qmdzM $)) ug / @))
ugaf6 cltqmd olb ;j]{Ifs c'gejL 5 eg] ;a} vdWofGt/ sf]0fx? Ps}
cj:yfdf l:y/ x'g' kb{5 . ha Pp6f cyjf a9L ;j]{If0f ul/Psf j:t'x?sf]
nflu k"0f{tf leGg} 5 eg] ta of] -oL_ j:t'x?sf] ;j]{If0f bf]x/ofpg'kb{5 . ha
c'gqmdlgsf cz'4tf % l;= -= )=)%)) ug_ eGbf a9L 5 eg] lyof]8f]nfO6
Pshgf tfnLd k|fKt d]sflgsn] ldnfpg'k5{ .
(=!$ clK6sn c'gnDa ;"rs
a]nf a]nfdf lyof]8f]nfO6sf] clK6sn c'gnDa ;"rs hf+Rg'kb{5 . of] ug{sf]
nflu ;aeGbf /fd|f] 7fpF 3/sf] leq xf] hxfF xfjf crn x'G5 . Pp6f ;fgf] qm;
snd -cyjf ;L;f snd_ n] e"O{df agfpg'kb{5 -kLg cyjf lsnf klg k|of]u
ug{ ;lsG5_ . oflGqs cg'nDa ;"rsåf/f lrGx dfly s]lGb|t u/]/ lyof]8f]nfO6
v8f ul/G5 . ta lyof]8f]n6 ;dtng ug'{ k5{ . ha clK6sn cg'nDa ;"rssf]
183
The theodolite is set up over the mark and centred by a mechanical
plumb bob. Then the theodolite must be levelled . If, when looking
through the eyepiece of the optical plumb bob the centre of the
crosshairs (or ring) is exactly on the mark on the floor, the optical
plumb bob is correct. When the position of the centre of the crosshairs
differs from the mark on the floor by more then 10mm the optical
plumb bob must be adjusted by a trained mechanic. Group must be
informed to arrange such adjustment.
9.2 Care and maintenance of theodolites
Take care of your theodolite ! A properly serviced theodolite will
enable you to make excellent observations!
Remember : - tighten the horizontal and vertical clamps when
the theodolite is in its housing (container) and
secure it firmly during long journeys. Always
use a foam-padded container for transport
- In wet or misty weather take the theodolite in
to a warm room, open its housing (container)
and allow the theodolite to dry for about an hour
but do not keep it close to a fire. Then close the
theodolite up in its housing again.
- Do not touch the optics (lenses) of the theodolite
even with a soft cloth unless it is absolutely
necessary. Clean the other parts of the theodolite
with the piece of soft cloth.
- Check the colour of the silicagel crystals in the
bag hanging on the theodolite. If they are not
blue but white or pink remove the crystals from
the bag and put them on a metal plate and hold it
above a low fire. Shake the crystals occasionally
so that they are not burned. After some minutes
of warming the crystals will change colour
back to blue again. Replace them in the bag
and attach it to the theodolite again. When the
crystals are blue again they are able to absorb

184
cfO{lk;af6 x]bf{ qm; x]P/ -cyjf 3]/f_ sf] s]Gb| 7ØfSs} e"O{sf] lrGxdf x'g' k5{
ta clK6sn cg'nDa ;'rs 7Ls 5 . ha qm; x]P/sf] s]Gb|sf] l:ylt lrGxaf6
!) ld=ld= eGbf a9Ln] km/s k5{ To; clK6sn cg'nDa ;"rs tfnLd k|fKt
d]sflgsn] ldnfpg'k5{ . o:tf] ldnfpg] Joj:yfsf] nflu u'|k ;"lrt ePsf] x'g'k5{ .
(=@ lyof]8f]nfO6sf] htg / d/Ddt
tkfO{sf] lyof]8f]nfO6sf] htg ug'{;\ ! Pp6f plrt tj/n] htg ul/Psf]
lyof]8f]nfO6n] tkfO{nfO{ 3fuwfg ;j]{If0fx? ug{ of]Uo agfpg] 5 !
ofb /fVgf];\ M – hlxn] klg o;nfO{ ef+8fdf /fVbf ;dtnLo / cg'nDa
RofKg]x? s:g';\ / nfdf] 9'jfgL x'g] a]nf o;nfO{ dha"t
l;t s:gf];\ . ;+w} 9'jfgLsf] nflu g/d u2f ePsf] ef+8f]
k|of]u ugf]{;\ .
– hlxn] klg, lbg cfb|{ / abnL ePsf] lyof] eg]
lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{ Pp6f Gofgf] sf]7fdf n}hfg'xf];\, ef+8f]
vf]Ng';\ / lyof]8f]nfO6 nfO{ ;'Sg s/Lj Ps 306f
5f]8\g';\ t/ cfuf]sf] glhs o;nfO{ g/fVg'xf];\ . ta
lyof]8f]nfO6nfO{ ef+8fleq km]l/ /fv]/ aGb ug'{xf];\ .
– lyof]8f]nfO6sf clK6snx? xftx?n] / g/d sk8fn] klg
g5'g'xf];\, ha;Dd Psbd h?/L 5 . lyof]8f]nfO6sf]
c? efux? Ps 6'qmf g/d sk8fn] ;kmf ug'{xf];\ .
– lyof]8f]nfO6df e'ml08/x]sf] y}nf]leqsf] l;lnsfh]n
bfgfx?sf] /ª hf+Rgf];\ . olb ltgLx? lgnf] 5}g t/
;]tf] cyjf u'nfkmL 5g\ eg] y}nf]af6 bfgfx? x6fpg'xf];\ /
ltgLx? Pp6f kmnfd] kftfdf /fVg';\ / sdhf]/L cfuf]dfly
;dfTg'xf]; . slxn] sfxL bfgfx?nfO{ rnfpg'xf];\, tfls
ltgLx? ganf];\ . s]xL ldg]6 ttfO;s]kl5 bfgfx?
km]l/ gLnf] /ªdf kl/jt{g x'g]5 . ta ltgLx?nfO{
y}nf]df /fVgf];\ lyof]8f]nfO6;+u hf]8\gf];\ . ha km]l/
bfgfx? gLnf] x'G5g\ ltgLx?n] lyof]8f]nfO6 3/leqsf]

185
 part of the moisture inside the housing of the
theodolite. Never leave the silicagel outside the
housing of the theodolite. Keep the housing of
the theodolite firmly closed at all times.
Remember that silicagel protects your theodolite.

186
 cfb|{tfsf] s]xL efu ;f]:g ;Sg] 5 . lyof]8f]nfO6sf]
3/ aflx/ l;lnsfh]nnfO{ slxn] klg g5f]8\gf];\ . ;+w}
lyof]8f]nfO6sf] 3/ dha"t ;+u aGb ug'{;\ .
:d/0f /xf];\ ls l;lnsfh]nn] tkfO{sf] lyof]8f]nfO6 arfpF5 .

187
10. FIELD PLOTTING

Plotting in the field (in the Group, Team or camp) is done in a

graphical way by using observed angles or compass bearings.
Means of assistance:
- protractor, graduated in 400g
- ruler
- brunton compass, graduated in 400g, - if plotting is done by
compass bearings directly.

10.1 Graphical intersection

The position of a new station can be found by intersection from
three (or more) known stations which are already plotted on the
observation diagram in the scale 1:25,000 or on the One Inch to One
Mile Map. When the field computer gets the observation books with
completed observations on those three (or more) known stations, he
can plot the new station by plotting the observed angles (directions)
by means of a protractor and ruler. The intersection of all plotted
directions on the new station is its position. The same plotting
can be done using compass bearings. This usually happens during
reconnaissance work (see chapter 3) when the observer wants to be
sure of the approximate location of a new station on his observaion
diagram or on the map.
10.2 Graphical resection
The position of a new station can be found by resection from the
observation at new station to four (or more) known stations which
are already plotted on the observation diagram in the scale 1:25,000
or on the One Inch to One Mile Map.

188
!)= If]lqo c+sg ug]{

;j]{If0f ul/Psf sf]0fx? cyjf lbs\ ;"rs lbs\ l:yltx? k|of]u u/]/ u|flkmsn
t/Lsfn] If]qdf -u'|kdf, 6f]nLdf / SofDkdf_ c+sg ul/G5 .
k|of]u ul/g] ;fdfgx? M
– k|f]6«ofS6/ $)) ugdf efu nufOPsf]
– ?n/
– a|G6g lbs\ ;"rs – $)) ugdf nufOPsf] olb l;w} lbs\ ;"rs lbs\
l:yltx?åf/f c+sg ul/G5 eg] .
!)=! u|flkmsn cGt/If]bg
Ps gofF cj:yfgsf] l:ylt tLg of tLgeGbf a9L 1ft cj:yfgx? cGt/5]bgaf6
lgsflnG5 h'g ;j]{If0f /]vflrqdf !M@%,))) df cyjf ! O~r–a/f]a/ !
dfOn gS;fdf klxn] g} c+sg ul/;s]sf x'G5g\ . ha If]qLo sDKo"6/n] tL
tLg of w]/} cj:yfx?df ;j]{If0f k"/f ul/Psf ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfx? kfOG5 pgn]
k|f]6«ofS6/ / ?n/åf/f tL ;j]{If0f u/]sf sf]0fx? cyjf lbzfx? c+sg u/]/
gofF cj:yfgsf] l:ylt c+sg ug{ ;S5 . ta tL ;a} c+sg ul/Psf lbzfx?sf]
gofF cj:yfglt/sf] cGt/5]bg g} o;sf] l:ylt xf] . ;f] c+sg lbs\ ;"rs lbs\
l:ylt k|of]u u/]/ klg ug{ ;lsG5 . of] cj:yf vf; u/]/ k"j{]If0f sfd ug]{
a]nfdf cfpF5, -cWofo # x]g'{;\_ ha ;j]{Ifsn] p;sf] ;j]{If0f /]vf lrq cyjf
gS;fdf gofF ca:yfgsf] cGbfhL l:ylt lglZrt\ ug{ rfxG5 .
!)=@ u|flkmsn k|ltIf]bg
gofF cj:yfgsf] l:ylt gofF cj:yfgaf6 rf/ of a9L 1ft cj:yfglt/
k|ltIf]bgåf/f lgsfNg ;lsG5 h'g ;j]{If0f /]vf lrqdf !M@%,))) cyjf !
O~r = ! dfOn gS;fdf klxnf g} c+sg ul/;s]sf x'G5g\ .

189
When the field computer gets the observation book with complete
observation of a new station he can plot it. Using a protractor he plots
all observed angles (directions) on a piece of a plastic sheet (or tracing
paper or tracing cloth). He places this on the observation diagram (or
map) and adjusts it until all rays pass through the observed, known
stations. The centre of the plotted angles (directions) is the position
of the new stations
The same plotting can be done using compass bearings. This usually
happens during reconnaissance work when the observer wants to be
sure of the approximate location of a new station on his observation
diagram or on the map.

10.3 Accuracy of graphical plotting

Graphical plotting can never be as accurate as plotting by
co-ordinatograph (plotting machine). Graphical plotting is normally
done actually in the field. Very often it has to be done directly on
the ground without the help of a table. No high degree of accuracy
should be expected. But this is sufficient for and observer or field
computer who only needs to find the approximate location of a new
station. In this way it can be seen if the terrain is evenly covered by
stations at roughly equal intervals.

190
ha If]qLo sDKo"6/n] gofF cj:yfgsf] k"/f ;j]{If0fsf ;fy ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf
kfpg] 5 of] c+sg ug{ ;S5 . k|f]6«ØfS6/åf/f pgn] ;a} ;j]{If0f u/]sf sf]0fx?
cyjf lbzfx? Ps kGgf Knfl:6s tfpdf -cyjf ptf/ sfuh cyjf ptf/
sk8f_ c+sg u5{ . To;kl5 p;n] o;nfO{ /]vf lrq cyjf gS;fdf /fV5 /
o;nfO{ ;f5{ / o;nfO{ 3'dfO{G5 ha;Dd ;a} /]vfx? ;j]{If0f ul/Psf 1ft
cj:yfgx? eP/ 5]8\g] 5 . ta c+sg ul/Psf sf]0fx? cyjf lbs\ l:yltx?sf]
s]Gb| gofF cj:yfgsf] l:ylt xf] .
;f]xL c+sg lbs\ ;"rs lbs\ l:yltx?åf/f ug{ ;lsG5 . of] cj:yf vf; u/]/
k"j]{If0f sfdsf] a]nfdf cfpF5 ha ;j]{Ifsn] p;sf] ;j]{If0f /]vf lrq cyjf
gS;fdf gofF cj:yfgsf] cGbfhL l:ylt lglZrt ug{ rfxG5 .
!)=# u|flkmsn c+sgsf] z'4tf
u|flkmsn c+sg slxn] klg lgofdsu|fkm -c+sg ug]{ pks/0f_ n] c+sg u/]sf]
hlt z'4 x'g ;Sb}g . vf; u/]/ u|flkmsn c+sg ug]{ sfd l;w} If]qdf ul/G5 .
w]/}h;f] ;fwf/0f 6]a'n geP/ e"O{df g} ug'{k5{ . t;y{ w]/} dfqfdf z'4tf
cfzf ug'{ kb}{g . t/ s'g} k|sf/n] Pp6f ;j]{Ifs cyjf If]qLo sDKo'6/nfO{
rflxg] ;"rgf gofF cj:yfgsf] cGbfhL l:ylt dfq lgsfNg' xf] . To; k|sf/n]
Ps hgfn] of] yfxf kfpF5 ls qmlds ?kn] If]q plQs} b"/Ldf cj:yfgx?n]
el/Psf] 5 .

191
11. FIELD COMPUTATION

Field computation which is mainly done by the field computer

consists of:
- checking the observation books for horizontal and zenithal
angles
- joining of different observation books for the same station
- graphical reduction to centre
- checking the closure of triangles.

11.1 Checking of the observation books for horizontal angle,

TRIG. FORM 1.11
The computer must check the calculations of the observers: the
means of the face left and face right readings, their reductions to the
R.O. and the mean of the sets.
The checks are made by adding up columns (3), (5), (7) which are
the actual readings and column (9), which is the mean of all the
observations (see appendixes C,D). In adding up the actual readings
the 200g difference in the face right angles is disregarded and instead
gons in the corresponding face left angles are added. Let us call:
- the sum of the first set A1, the sum of the second set A2, etc,
- the means of the reading to the reference object (R.O.) in the
first set 01, in the second set 02, etc
- the sum of the means of all observations B,
- the number of objects n,
- the number of sets S,

192
!! If]qLo sDKo'6]zg

If]qLo sDKo'6]zgdf kg]{ M

— ;dtnLo / vdWofGt/ sf]0fx?sf] nflu ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfx? hfFRg]
— pxL cj:yfgsf] nflu ljleGg ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfx? hf]8\g]
— u|flkmsn t/Lsfn] s]Gb|df Nofpg]
— lqsf]0fx?sf] k"0f{tf hfFRg] .
!!=! ;dtnLo sf]0fx?sf] nflu ;j]I{ f0f k'l:tsfx? hf“Rg], TRIG. FORM 1.11
sDKo"6/n] ;j]{Ifsn] u0fgf u/]sf] hf+Rg'k5{M b]a|] df]x8f / bflxg] df]x8fsf]
l/l8ªx?sf] dWodfg, ltgLx?sf] lgb]{z j:t' (R.O.)df kl/jt{g / ;]6x?sf]
dWodfg .
k+lQmx? -#_,-%_,-&_ h'g vf; l/l8ªx? x'g / k+lQm -(_ h'g ;a} ;j]{If0fx?sf]
dWodfg xf], hf]8]/ hf+rx? agfOPsf] 5 -kl/lzi6 C, D x]g'{;\_ . vf; l/l8ªx?
hf]8\8f bflxg] df]x8fsf] sf]0fx?df @)) ug km/snfO{ gdfGg] / o;sf] ;§fdf
cg'?k b]a|] df]x8f sf]0fx?sf] ugx? hf]l8G5 .
xfdLn] egf}+ M
— klxnf] ;]6sf] hf]8 A1, bf];|f] ;]6sf] hf]8 A2, OToflb .
— lgb]{z j:t' (R.O.) sf] l/l8ªx?sf] dWodfg klxnf] ;]6df 01 bf];|f]
;]6df 02 OToflb .
— ;a} ;j]{If0fx?sf] dWodfgsf] hf]8 B,
— ljGb'x?sf] ;+Vof n,
— ;]6x?sf] ;+Vof s .

193
The formula for the check is then the follwing:
A1 A2 .... AS
2 + + + = S × B + n × ( 01 + 02 + .... + 0S ).
2 2
Look at the appendix C, observation book for station 1648:
The sum of the readings face left and face right is 1850. 8100g= A1.
Dividing this sum by 2 we get 925.4050g. Deduct the multiples of
a full circle from this result, i.e. the multiple of 400g, which in this
case is 800 g. Write the reminder (=125.4050g) in pencil below the
sum of A1. Do the same with the other sets (see 262.4685g in the
second and 3.8495g in the third set). Sum all the means to the R.O.
and write it in brackets above the reduction of the R.O. (=0.000g) in
column (9), see 201.9805g. From now on all further calculations will
be made only in column (9).
Compute all the means in column (9), but be careful not to include
the value in brackets (see last sentence). Deduct the multiple of
400g from this sum and write the remainder below the last mean
(i.e.125.2931g). Multiply this sum by the number of sets (in appendix
C there are three sets - so multiply be 3) and write the product
in the next line of the same column (i.e.375.8793g). Then multiply
the value in brackets by the number of stations observed, i.e. by the
number of means of all sets (in this case 8) and write the product
in the next line (i.e.1615.8440g). Then add the last two values and
deduct the multiples of 400g, that is

375.8793 g
+ 1615.8440 g
1991.7233 g
– 1600.0000 g

391.7233 g - and write the remainder in the next line.
And finally compute all the reminder sums in sets (125.4050g in the
first, 262.4685g in the second and 3.8495g in the third set) and write
the sum in the next line (i.e.391.7230g). The last two values must be
the same. Only a small difference in centesimal seconds is permitted.

194
ta hf+Rgsf] nflu tn n]lvPsf] ;'q 5 M
A1 A2 .... AS
2 + 2
+ + = S × B + n × ( 01 + 02 + .... + 0S ).
2
kl/lzi6 C x]g'{;, cj:yfg !^$* sf] nflu ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf M
b]a|] df]x8f / bflxg] df]x8fsf] l/l8ªx?sf] hf]8 !*%)=*!)) ug = A1 x'G5 .
o;nfO{ @ n] efu u/]/ (@%=$)%) ug kfpF5f}+ . k"/f j[Qsf u'0fsx?n] o;
kmnaf6 36fpg'xf];\ Tof] xf] $)) ugsf] u'0fsn], h'g o:df *)) ug xf] . z]if
c+s - = !@%=$)%) ug_ A1 sf] hf]8sf] d'lGt/ k]lG;ndf n]Vg';\ . c? ;]6x?df
klg p:t} ug'{ xf]; -@^@=$^*% ug bf];|f] ;]6df / #=*$(% ug t];|f] ;]6df x]g'{; _ .
;a} dWodfgx? lgb]{z j:t' (R.O) ;+u hf]8\g';\ / o;nfO{ kl/jlt{t R.O.
-)=)))) ug_ sf] dfly j|fs]6x?leq k+lQm -(_ df n]Vg';\, x]g{';\= @)!=(*)% ug .
oxfFb]lv cufl8 ;a} c? u0fgfx? k+lQm -(_ df dfq ul/g] 5 .
k+lQm -(_ df ;a} dWodfgx? u0fgf ug'{;, t/ a|fs]6 leqsf dfgx? o;leq
gkfg{sf] nflu xf]lzof/ x'g';\ -clGtd jfSo x]g'{xf];\_ . $)) ugsf] u'0fs o;
hf]8af6 x6fpg'xf];\ / af+sL -z]if c+s_ clGtd dWodfgsf] d'lGt/ n]Vg'xf];\
-Tof] xf] !@%=@(#! ug_ . of] hDdfnfO{ ;]6x?sf] ;+Vofn] u'Gg'xf];\ -kl/lzi6
C df tLgj6f ;]6x? 5g\, t;y{ # n] u'gf ug'{;\_ / u'0fg kmnnfO{ pxL
k+lQmsf] csf]{ x/kmdf n]Vg'xf];\ -Tof] xf] #&%=*&(# ug_ . ta a|fs]6 leqsf]
dfgnfO{ ;j]{If0f ul/Psf cj:yfgx?sf] ;+Vofn] u'0f ug'{xf];\ To:sf] dtna
;a} ;]6x?sf] dWodfgsf] ;+Vofn] -o;df *_ / u'0fg kmnnfO{ csf]{ x/kmdf
n]Vg'xf];\ -Tof] xf] !^!%=*$$) ug_ . ta clGtdsf] b'a} dfgnfO{ hf]8\g'; /
$)) ugsf] u'0fsn] 36fpg'xf];\, Tof] xf]
#&%=*&(# ug
±!^!%=*$$) ug
!((!=&@## ug
— !^))=)))) ug
#(!=&@## ug / af+ls csf]{ x/kmdf n]Vg'xf];\ . cGtdf ;]6x?df
;a} af+sL hf]8x?nfO{ u0fgf ug'{; -!@%=$)%) ug klxnf]df, @^@=$^*%
ug bf];|f]df / #=*$(% ug t];|f]df_ / hf]8 csf]{ x/kmdf n]vg';\ -Tof] xf]
#(!=&@#) ug_ . clGtdsf] b'O{ dfgx? plx g} x'g' kb{5 . ;]G6L ;]G6L ugdf
195
If the difference is larger, then the calculation of either the observer
or the computer is wrong and all calculation must be done again by
the computer. When the computer finds the observation book correct
he signs it and adds the date.

The computer must also check that the difference between the
opening and closing reading to the R.O. of each set is not more than
the tolerance (see paragraph 8.124); and that the difference between
the lowest and the highest reduced mean of an observed object is not
more than the tolerance (see paragraph 8.124).

11.11 Distribution of miscloure of horizontal observations

The difference between the opening and closing reading to the R.O.
is called the misclosure.

For first, second and third order observations the misclosure

is distributed to the observed objects in the following way (see
appendix D).

Divide the misclosure (+3.8cc) by the number of objects (one R.O.

excluded, that means 4 objects as in the example) and call the result
x(i.e. = + 3.8cc : 4= + 0.95cc). For the first station (12 Sabit) the correction
will be xcc (= +1.0cc). For the the second station (13 Batuwa) 2xcc
(= +1.9cc). For the third station (11 Korchon) 3 xcc (= +2.9cc) and
for the last one (the R.O. = 15 Kaskikot) the correction will be 4 xcc
(= +3.8cc), that is equal to the misclosure. Write the new, corrected
result with red ball-point pen above the previous result in column
(9) - mean of sets.

11.2 Checking observation books of zenithal angles

In observation book - zenithal angles (TRIG. FROM 1.12) the field
computer must always check that the height of the theoldolite, the
height of the signal and the arrows (to the points of target to which it
was pointed and observed) have been correctly booked. The methods
of checking are different for theololites T2, T16 and theololite T 3.

196
s]xL cjz]ifnfO{ dfq 5'6 lbg ;lsg] 5 . olb To; cjz]if 7"nf] 5 eg] ta
of t ;j]{Ifsn] u/]sf] u0fgf cyjf sDKo'6/ g} unt 5 / ;a} u0fgf km]l/
sDKo'6/n] ug'{k5{ . ha sDKo'6/n] ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf 7Ls kfpF5 pgn] o;df
;xL u5{ / ldlt /fV5 .
sDKo'6/n] Tof] klg hf+Rg' k5{ ls k|To]s ;]6sf] R.O. sf] z'? / clGtdsf] l/l8ªx?
aLrdf lbOPsf] ;LdfeGbf a9L km/s 5}g -cg'R5]b *=!@$ x]g; {' _; / Pp6f
;j]I{ f0f ul/Psf] j:t'sf] sd;]sd / a9L ;] a9L lgsflnPsf] dWodfgaLrdf
cjz]if lbOPsf] ;LdfeGbf a9L km/s 5}g -cg'R5]b *=!@$ x]g; {' _\ .
!!=!! ;dtnLo ;j]{If0sf] ck"0f{tf af+8\g] -ljefhg_
R.O. sf] z'? / clGtd l/l8ªx?aLrsf] cjz]ifnfO{ ck"0f{tf elgG5 . k|yd,
bf];|f] / t];|f] bhf{sf ;j]{If0fx?df To; ck"0f{tfnfO{ lgDg k|sf/n] ;j]I{ f0f
ul/Psf j:t'x?df ljefhg ul/G5 -kl/lzi6 D x]g'{;\_ .
ck"0f{tf -± #=* l;=l;=_ nfO{ j:t'x?sf] ;+Vofn] efu ug'{;\ -Pp6f R.O.
g/fVg], pbfx/0fdf $ j6f j:t'x?_ / efukmnnfO{ x -Tof] xf] x = ± #=*M $ = ±
)=(% l;=l;=_ egf}+ . klxnf] cj:yfg -!@ ;ljt_ n] x l;=l;= - = ± !=)) l;=l;=_
zf]wg kfpg] 5 . bf];|f] cj:yfg -!# j6'jf_ n] 2x l;=l;= -= ± !=( l;=l;=_ .
t];|f] cj:yfg -!! sf]r'{g_ n] 3x l;=l;= - = ± @=( l;=l;=_ / clGtd (R.O.=
!% sfl:s sf]6 n] 4x l;=l;= -= ± #=* l;=l;=_ zf]wg kfpg] 5 h'g ck"0f{tf
a/fa/ 5 . gofF z'4 ul/Psf] gtLhf /ftf] 86k]gn] ;]6x? dWodfgsf] k+lQm
-(_ df k'/fgf] gtLhfsf] dfly n]Vg';\ .
!!=@ vdWofGt/ sf]0fx?sf] ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf hf+Rg]
vdWofGt/ sf]0fx?sf] ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfdf (TRIG. FORM 1.12) If]qLo
sDKo'6/n] ;+w} of] hf+Rg'k5{ ls lyof]8f]nfO{6sf] prfO{ n]lv;s]sf] 5, lgzfg
lrGxsf] prfO{ / lgzfg lrGxsf] ljGb"x?nfO{ lbOPsf] lt/ - _ -htflt/ o;nfO{
b]vfOPsf] / ;j]{If0f ul/G5_ . vdWofGt/ sf]0fx?sf] nflu ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfx?sf]
hf+Rg] sfd T2 ,T16 / T3 lyof]8f]nfO{6nfO{ leGg} t/Lsfn] lgDg k|sf/n]
ul/G5 .

197
Method for T2 and T16 theodolites
The field computer must check the mean of the two readings for
each face (see appendix F). If he finds that the mean recorded by
the observer is correct he ticks it. After that the field computer must
check if the sum of the means of face left and face right is correct.
The sum should be close to 400g. If he finds that the sum made by
the observen is correct he ticks it. After that the field computer must
find the correction which is half the difference between the sum of
the face left and face right means and 400g. This correction must be
added to the face right mean and the sum written in pencil in column
(8) below the zenithal angle previously calculated by the observer.
The sum of these two values must be 400g exactly. On completing
the check the computer must sign each page below the last reading
in column (8) and enter the date.
Method for T 3 theodolite
The value of a zenithal angle for T 3 theodolite is obtained by the
formula :
z = 100g + mean of face right - mean of face left.

To check the observation book the computer must again calculate

the two readings for each face (see appendix G) and tick them if
they are correct. Then he must check the sum of the face left and
face right means. The sum should be close to 200g. If he finds that
the sum made by the observer is correct he ticks it. The zenithal
angle is calculated by the above formula and entered in column (8).
The elevation or depression (face left mean minus face right mean)
is calculated and written in pencil below the zenithal angle. The sum
of these two values (the zenithal angle plus or minus the elevation
or the depression) must be exactly 100g. On completing the check
the field computer must sign each page in column (8) below the last
reading and enter the date.
11.3 Joint observation
Joining different observations at the same station into one is called
joint observation (see paragraph 8.125). This procedure could be
seen form appendixes E1 - E3, where appendix E 1 is observation

198
lyof]8f]nfO6 T2 / T16
sDKo'6/n] k|To]s df]x8fsf] b'Oj6f l/l8ªx?sf] dWodfg hf+Rg'k5{ -kl/lzi6 F_
x]g'{;\ . olb ;j]{Ifsn] lgsfn]sf] dWodfg l7s 5 eg] p;n] o;df l7s lrGx
nufpg] 5 . To;kl5 sDKo'6/n] hfRg' k5{ ls b]a|] df]x8f / bflxg] df]x8fsf]
dWodfgx?sf] hf]8 7Ls 5 . hf]8 $)) ug glhs x'g' k5{ . olb ;j]{Ifsn]
hf]8]sf] l7s 5 eg] p;n] l7s lrGx nufOlbG5 . To;kl5 sDKo'6/n] Tof] zf]wg
lgsfNg' k5{ h'g b]a|] df]x8f / bflxg] df]x8fsf] dWodfgsf] hf]8 / $)) ugsf]
aLrsf] cjz]ifsf] cfwf xf] . of] zf]wg bflxg] df]x8fsf] dWodfgnfO{ hf]8\g'k5{
/ of] hf]8 vdWofGt/sf] sf]0fsf] d'lg k+lQm -*_ df k]lG;nn] n]Vg'k5{ h'g
vdWofGtf/ sf]0f ;j]{Ifsn] klxnf g} u0fgf ul/;s]sf] x'G5 . oL b'O{nfO{ hf]8]/
p;n] 7ØfSs} $)) ug kfpg'k5{ . hfFlr;s]kl5 sDKo'6/n] k+lQm -*_ df
clGtd l/l8ªsf] d'lGt/ k|To]s k]hdf ;xL ug'{k5{ / ldlt /fVg'k5{ .\
lyof]8f]nfO6 T3
lyof]8f]nfO{6 T3 sf] nflu tnsf] ;'q k|of]u u/]/ vdWofGt/ sf]0fsf] dfg
lgsflnG5 M z = !)) ug + bflxg] df]x8fsf] dWodfg – b]a|] df]x8sf] dWodfg,
;j]{If0f k'l:tsf hf+Rgsf] nflu sDKo'6/n] k|To]s df]x8fsf] b'O{j6f l/l8ªsf]
dWodfg km]l/ lgsfNg'k5{ -kl/lzi6 G x]g'{xf];\_ / l7s lrGx lbg'k5{ olb ltgLx?
l7s 5 eg] . To;kl5 p;n] b]a|] df]x8f / bflxg] df]x8fsf] dWodfgx?sf] hf]8
hf+Rg'k5{ . Tof] hf]8 @)) ugsf] glhs x'g'k5{ . olb hf]8 l7s eP o;df l7s
lrGx nufpg'k5{ . vdWofGt/ sf]0f dflysf] ;'q k|of]u u/]/ u0fgf ul/G5 /
k+lQm -*_ df n]lvG5 . ;dpRr jf ;dlgRr sf]0f -b]a|] df]x8f dWodfg–bflxg]
df]x8f dWodfg_ u0fgf ul/G5 / vdWofGt/ sf]0fsf] d'lGt/ k]lG;nn] n]lvG5 .
oL b'O{j6f dfgx? hf]l8Pdf hf]8 7ØfSs} !)) ug x'g'k5{ -vdWofGt/ sf]0f ±
;dpRr jf ;dlgRr sf]0f_ . hf+Rg ;lsPkl5 sDKo'6/n] k+lQm -*_ sf] clGtd
l/l8ªsf] d'lGt/ k|To]s k]hdf ;lx ug'{k5{ / ldlt /fVg'k5{ .
!!=# hf]l8Psf] ;j]{If0f
ljleGg ;j]{If0fx? Pp6} cj:yfgdf hf]l8Psf]nfO{ hf]l8Psf] ;j]{If0f elgG5
-cg'R5]b *=!@% x]g'{;\_ . of] sfo{ s;/L ug]{ af/] kl/lzi6 E1-E3 af6 a'‰g

199
book I, appendix E2 is observation book II and appendix E3 is the
joint observation book.
To obtain the "error" (= -0.9cc) we have to divide the sum of the
differences of I minus II (see appendix E 3, where it is - 7cc) by "n"
multiplied by 2 (4×2).

Error = sum : (n ×2) = - 7cc:8 = - 0.9cc, where "n" is total number

of common objects for the observation book I and observation
book II.

Calculation of the joint observations is done in the following way.

For common objects in observation books I and II the arithmetical

mean value is calculated (see station 1243 mean = 19.1580g).
For objects that are not common the "error" will be accounted in
observation book I or II,
- Observation in observation book I minus the "error" (i.e.
252.7095g - (-0.9cc)=252.7096g)
- Observation in observation book II plus the "error" (i.e.
50.6593g + (- 0.9cc) = 50.6592g)

If there are more than two observation books to be joined, send the
observation books to HQ for joining, but check first that the angles
between the common objects are correct. If, in the case of repetition,
all objects in the first observation book are observed in the second,
repeated, observation book and there is no triangle misclosure, the
first observation book should be cancelled. Draw a line across the
first observation book and write "cancelled, the station is repeated".
There are limits that have to be considered for joining. The difference
I-II must not exceed :

First order ................ 5cc (=0.0005g)

Second order ................ 10cc (=0.0010g)
Third order ................ 15cc (=0.0015g)
Fourth ................ 30cc (=0.0030g)

200
;lsG5 hxfF kl/lzi6 E1 ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf I xf] E2 ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf II xf] /
E3 hf]l8Psf] ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf xf] .

æcz'4tfÆ -= -)=( l;=ld=_ kfpgsf] nflu xfdLn] I-II sf] cjz]ifx?sf] hf]8
-kl/lzi6 E3 h;df of] – & l;=l;= 5 x]g'{;\_ nfO{ @ u'0ff ul/Psf] / ænÆ
(4 × 2) n] efu ug'{kb{5 .

cz'4tf = hf]8 M (n × 2) = –& l;=l;=M $ × @ = — )=( l;=l; hxfF æn Æ

;j]{If0f k'l:tsf I / II sf pxL j:t'x?sf] nflu hDdf ;+Vof xf] .
lgDg k|sf/n] hf]l8Psf ;j]{If0fx?sf] u0fgf ul/G5 .
;j]{If0f k'l:tsf I / II df pxL j:t'x?sf] nflu c+sul0ft dWodfg u0fgf
ul/G5 -cj:yfg !@$# x]g'{;\ dWodfg = !(=!%*) ug_ . pxL gePsf]
j:t'x?sf] nflu æcz'4tfÆ ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf I cyjf II df lx;fj ul/g] 5,
– ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf I sf] ;j]{If0f – æcz'4tfÆ
-Tof] xf] @%@=&)(% ug – -–)=( l;=l;=_ = @%@=&)(^ ug_
– ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf II sf] ;j]{If0f + æcz'4tfÆ
-Tof] xf] %)=^%(# ug + -–)=( l;=l;=_ = %)=^%(@ ug_ .
olb b'O{eGbf a9L ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf h'g hf]8\g'kg]{ 5g\ eg] ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfx?nfO{
hf]8\gsf] nflu s]Gb|lt/ k7fO lbg'xf];\ t/ klxnf hf+Rg';\ ls pxL j:t'x?sf]
aLrsf] sf]0fx? ldn]sf 5g\ . olb bf]x/fOg] cj:yfdf klxnf] ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfdf
ePsf ;a} j:t'x? bf];|f] -bf]xf]/fOPsf] ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf_ df klg ;j]{If0f
ul/Psf 5g\ eg] / To;df lqsf]0fsf] ck"0f{tf 5}g eg] klxnf] ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf
/2 ug'{k5{ . klxnf] ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfsf] dfemaf6 Pp6f wsf]{ lvRg';\ / lz/df
n]Vg';\, æ/2 ul/Psf], cj:yfg bf]xf]/fOPsf] 5 .Æ
oL ;Ldfx? hf]8\gsf nflu dfGg'kg]{ 5 . cjz]if I - II tneGbf a9L x'b}gM
% l;=l;= -)=)))% ug_ — k|yd bhf{sf] nflu
!) l;=l;= -)=))!) ug_ — bf];|f] bhf{sf] nflu
!% l;=l;= -)=))!% ug_ — t];|f] bhf{sf] nflu
#) l;=l;= -)=))#) ug_ — rf}yf] bhf{sf] nflu
201
11.31 Checking of joint observations
There are two kind of checks to do :
a) When we join two observation books into one we must chose
a R.O. that is common to both observation books. This usually
means that we have to change the R.O. in at least one of them
and recalculate that observation book, which means that we have
to make the observations to the R.O. equal in both observation
books (usually we chose 0.0000g). For the recalculation we
must thus substract the R.O. observation from each observation
(see 331.3235g - 312.1653g = 19.1582g for station 1243). To
check if the recalculation was correctly done, we proceed in the
following way :
Calculate the sum of the observation column in the
observation book where the R.O. was changed. In our
example the R.O. was changed from station 1238 to
station 1244 (see appendix E 2 and E 3). The new sum is
370.0198g, reduced by the multiply of 400g.
The new R.O., station 1244, had a different observation
value (312.1653g). Multiply this value by the number of
objects in the recalculated observation book, i.e 312.1653g
× 7 = 185.1571g (reduced by the multiple of 400g). Add the
obtained values : 370.0198g + 185.1571g = 155. 1769g.
This result must be the same as the sum of the observation
column in the original observation book. If so, the
recalculation is correct. Note that in appendix E 2 the sum
is 155.1766g because the closing reading is accounted. For
this kind of check it should not be accounted, because the
sum is 155.1769g, the same as the one obtained above.

b) To check if the calculation of the joint observations was correct,

we proceed in the following way :
Calculate the sums of the observation columns of
observation book I, II and the joint observations (see
appendix E3). Let us call the different sums A, B, C,
respectively.

202
!!=#! hf]l8Psf ;j]{If0fx? hf+Rg]
b'O{ k|sf/sf hf+rx? ug'{kg]{ 5g\ M
s_ ha xfdLn] b'O{ ;j]I{ f0fx? Pp6}df hf]85f}+ xfdLn] Pp6f R.O. 5fGg'
k5{ h'g b'j} ;j]I{ f0f k'l:tsfdf pxL g} x'G5 . w]/h } ;f] o;sf] dtna
xfdLn] sd;]sd ltgLx?dWo] Pp6fdf R.O. sf] kl/jt{g u'gk{ 5{ / km]l/
;j{I] f0f k'l:tsfdf u0fgf ub{5f},+ h;sf] dtna xf] ls xfdLn] b'j}
;j]I{ f0f k'l:tsfdf R.O. sf] ;j]I{ f0f a/fa/ agfpg'kg]{ 5
-w]/h} ;f] xfdLn] )=)))) ug 5fG5f}_+ . km]l/ u0fgf ug{sf] nflu xfdLn] k|To]s
;j]I{ f0faf6 R.O. ;j]I{ f0f 36fpg'kb{5 -x]g;{' \ ##!=#@#% ug – #!@=!^%# ug
= !(=!%*@ ug cj:yfg !@$# sf] nflu_, km]l/ ul/Psf] u0fgf
7Ls lyof] ls eGg] hf+RgnfO{ xfdLn] lgGg lnlvt t/Lsfn] a9\5f}+ M
;j]{If0f k'l:tsfdf h:df R.O. kl/jt{g ul/Psf] lyof], ;j]{If0f k+lQmsf]
hDdf ug'{;\ . xfd|f] pbfx/0fdf R.O. cj:yfg !@#* af6 !@$$ df kl/jt{g
ul/Psf] lyof] -kl/lzi6 E1 / E3 x]g'{;\_ gofF hf]8 #&)=)!(* ug xf],
$)) ugsf] u'0fsn] lgsfn]sf] .
gofF R.O. cj:yfg !@$$ ;+u leGg} ;j]{If0f dfg -#!@=!^%# ug_
lyof] . km]l/ u0fgf ul/Psf] ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfdf o; dfgnfO{ j:t'x?sf]
;+Vofn] u'0ff ug'{xf];\, Tof] xf] #!@=!^%# × & = !*%=!%&! ug -$))
ugsf] u'0fs 36fP/_ .
k|fKt ePsf dfgx? hf]8g\ f];\ M #&)=)!(* ug + !*%=!%&! ug =
!%%=!&^( ug . of] gtLhf k'/fgf] ;j]I{ f0f k'l:tsfsf] ;j]I{ f0f k+lQmsf]
hf]8;+u a/fa/ x'gk' 5{ . olb o:tf] 5 eg] km]l/ ul/Psf] u0fgf l7s;+u
ul/Psf] 5 . ofb ug'; { \ ls kl/lzi6 E2 df hf]8 !%%=!&^^ ug 5 lsgls
clGtd l/l8ª lnOPsf] 5 . o; lsl;dsf] hf+Rg] sfddf o;nfO{ lnPsf]
x'gk' b}g{ , hals hf]8 !%%=!&^( ug 5, dfly lgsflnPsf] hlQs} .
v_ hf]l8Psf ;j]{If0fx? 7Ls;+u ul/Psf] lyof] ls eGg] hf+RgnfO{ xfdLn] lgGg
k|sf/n] cufl8 a9\g] 5f}+ M
;j]{If0f k'l:tsf I, II / hf]l8Psf ;j]{If0fx?sf] ;j]{If0f k+lQmx?sf]
hf]8 ug'{;\, -kl/lzi6 E3 x]g'{;\_ . xfdLn] ljleGg hf]8x?nfO{ qmdzM
A, B, C egf}+ .

203
 A = 149.7712g
B = 370.0198g
C = 222.7287g.
Add A and B ( = 119.7910g).
Add in the column of joint observations the values of the
common objects. Let us call this sum D (D = 297.0620g).
Substract D from A plus B: A + B - D = 222.7290g.
To obtain the joint observations we had to substruct and add,
respectively, the "error" ( - 0.9cc) from observation book I and
II. Count how many times we did that in each observation
book. Multiply the "error" by the number of times we used
it in observation book I and change the sign. Multiply the
"error" by the number of times we used it in observation book
II. Add the two results and call the sum E.

E = - [1 × (-0.9CC)] + [3 × (-0.9CC)] = - 2CC

Final check : A + B - D + E = C. If this is confirmed the
joining has been done correctly. Only a very small difference
is permitted.
The computer sings and dates the joint observations.

Note: The example of the joint observations as seen in appendixes

shows the observations for the fourth order. In this order
the final result is obtained in seconds (0.0001g) because the
accuracy of T16 theodolite normally used is of the order
0.001g only.
For second and third order observations more precise
theodolites T2 and T3 are used and therefore joining of these
observations has to account for decimal point of second
(0.00001g)
11.4 Graphical reduction to centre
For some reason there may be a small eccentricity at a station or in a signal

204
 A = !$(=&&!@ ug
B = #&)=)!(* ug
C = @@@=&@*& ug
A / B hf]8\g';\ - = !!(=&(!) ug_ .
hf]l8Psf ;j]{If0fx?sf] k+lQmdf pxL j:t'sf] dfgx? hf]8\g';\ . of]
hDdfnfO{ xfdLn] D egf}+ -D = @(&=)^@) ug_ . A / B sf] hf]8af6
D 36fpg' xf];\ M A + B - D = @@@=&@() ug .

hf]l8Psf] ;j]{If0f kfpgsf] nflu xfdLn] I / II af6 æcz'4tfÆ -–)=(

l;=l;=_ qmdzM 36fpg' / hf]8\g' lyof] . k|To]s ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfdf
xfdLn] o:tf] slt k6s u/of}+ Tof] uGg';\ . æcz'4tfÆ nfO{ ;j]{If0f
k'l:tsf I df k|of]u ul/Psf] ;+Vofn] u'0ff ug'{;\ / lrGx kl/jt{g ug'{;\ .
æcz'4tfÆ nfO{ ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf II df k|of]u ul/Psf] ;+Vofn] u'0ff
ug'{;\ . oL b'O{ gtLhfnfO{ hf]8\g';\ / o;nfO{ E egf}+ .
E = - [ ! × -–)=(_] + [ # × -–)=(_ ] = -@ l;=l;=
clGtd hf+Rg] sfd M A + B - D + E = C olb of] hf+r ldn]sf] 5 eg]
hf]l8g] sfd 7Ls;+u ePsf] 5 . w]/} sd cjz]ifnfO{ dfq 5"6 lbOPsf] 5 .
sDKo'6/n] hf]l8Psf] ;j]{If0fx?df ;xL u5{ / ldlt yK5 .
6LKk0fL M ofb /fVgf];\ ls c'g;"rLsf] hf]l8Psf] ;j]{If0fsf] pbfx/0fn] rf}yf]
bhf{sf] nflu Pp6f ;j]{If0f k'l:tsf b]vfpF5 . o; pbfx/0fdf
clGtd gtLhf xfdLn] ;]s]08x? -)=)))! ug_ df kfpF5f}+,
lsgls T16 lyof]8f]nfO{6 -w]/}h;f] rf}yf] bhf{sf] nflu k|of]u ul/g]_
sf] z'4tf )=))! ug dfq 5 .\
bf];|f] / t];|f] bhf{sf] ;j]{If0fsf] nflu xfdLn] T16 eGbf a9L
z'4tfsf] ;fy ljN8 T2 / T3 lyof]8f]nfO6x? k|of]u ub{5f}+ . ta
xfdLn] o:tf cj:yfgx?nfO{ hf]8\bf ;]s]08sf] bzdnjnfO{ klg
lx;fjdf lng'kg]{ 5 -)=))))! ug_ .
!!=$ u|flkmsn t/Lsfn] s]Gb|df Nofpg]
s]xL sf/0fjz Pp6f cj:yfg cyjf Pp6f lgzfg lrGxdf yf]/}n] pTs]Gb|tf

205
(target). To be able to close the triangle (and to check if the observations
are correct) with an eccentricity at one or more stations, the computer must
first make a graphical reduction to centre to obtain corrected observations.
From the observation book for horizontal angles he will take the eccentric
data (distance "e" and the observed angle to the eccentric station or target,
see appendixes K,L,M) in order to plot the eccentric on the observation
diagram in the scale One Inch to One Mile (1:63,360).
The eccentric distance must be plotted in the scale 1:2. For this use the
diagonal scale on Reduction to Centre Graphs (TRIG. FORM 1.31)
which is drawn in the scale 1:2. After plotting the eccentric on the
observation diagram (in the scale One Inch to One Mile) with a protractor
and the ruler, draw the perpendicular from the plotted position of the
eccentric to the line joining the station and the object. After drawing
the perpendicular on the observation diagram measure the distance
between the station and the object with a pair of dividers and set it
on the corresponding scale (graduated in kilometres) on Reduction to
Centre Graphs. Then measure the length of the perpendicular with a
pair of dividers and set it out at right angles to the vertical scale and read
off the angular correction in centesimal seconds (cc) from the graphs.
Whether the correction is plus or minus it can be seen from the
position of the centre.

CORRECTION
PERPENDICULAR

DISTANCE

fig. 72

206
x'g ;S5 . To;sf/0f Ps cyjf a9L s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] cj:yfgx?;lxt
lqsf]0fsf] k"j0f{tf x]g{ -/ hf+Rgls ;j]{If0fx? 7Ls 5_, sDKo'6/n] 7Ls ;j]{If0fx?
kfpg klxnf u|flkmsn t/Lsfn] s]Gb|df Nofpg] sfd ug'{k5{ . ;dtnLo
sf]0fx?sf] ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfaf6 pgn] s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] tYof+s -b"/L æeÆ /
s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] cj:yfg jf lgzfg lrGxsf] ;j]{If0f ul/Psf] sf]0f,
kl/lzi6 K, L, M x]g'{;\_ dfg Ps OGr a/fa/ Ps dfOn -!M^#,#^)_ sf]
;j]{If0f /]vf lrqdf s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] c+sg ug{sf] nflu lng]5 .
s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] b"/L !M@ df c+sg ul/Psf] x'gk' 5{ . o;sf] nflu s]Gb|df Nofpg]
u|fkmx? (TRIG. FORM 1.31) sf] s0f{–dfg h'g !M@ dfgdf lvlrPsf] 5,
k|of]u ug'x{ f];\ . k|f6] f« S6/ / ?n/n] ;j]I{ f0f /]vf lrqdf s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] c+sg
ul/;s]kl5 -! O~r = ! dfOn_ s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] c+sg u/]sf] l:yltaf6 j:t'
/ cj:yfg hf]8s ] f] /]vfdf nDa lvRg'xf];\ . ;j]I{ f0f /]vf lrqdf nDa lvlr;s]
kl5 Ps hf]8f l8efO8/n] j:t' / cj:yfgsf] aLrsf] b"/L gfKg';\ / o;nfO{
cg'?k dfgdf -lsnf]ld6/df sf]/s ] f]_ s]Gb|df Nofpg] u|fkmx?df ldnfpg'xf];\ .
ta Ps hf]8f l8efO8/n] nDasf] b'/L gfKgf];\ / cg'nDa dfg ;dsf]0f x'g] u/L
ldnfpg' xf];\ / ;]lG6 ;]G6Lug -l;=l;=_ df u|fkmaf6 sf]0fLo zf]wg k9\gx' f];\ .
zf]wg + cyjf – 5 eGg] s]Gb|sf] l:yltaf6 b]lvG5 .

;'wf/
nDa

b"/L
lrq &@

207
11.41 Eccentric at the occupied station
The eccentric at a theodolite station (occupied station) where :
A .................. is observed angle
A'................... is corrected angle
d .................. is correction of eccentricity.

fig. 73

11.42 Eccentric at observed station

The eccentric at an observed station (object), where :
A .................. is observed angle
A' .................. is corrected angle
d .................. is correction of eccentricity.

208
!!=$! cf]ul6Psf] cj:yfgdf s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf]
s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] lyof]8f]nfO{6 v8f u/]sf] cj:yfg -cf]ul6Psf] :yfgdf_ 5
h;dfM
A = ;j]{If0f u/]sf] sf]0f
A' = ;RofO{Psf] sf]0f
d = s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] zf]wg

lrq &#
!!=$@ ;j]{If0f u/]sf] cj:yfgdf s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf]
s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] ;j]{If0f u/]sf]df-j:t'_ 5 h;df M
A = ;j]{If0f u/]sf] sf]0f
A'= ;RofO{Psf] sf]0f
d = s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] zf]wg

209
 fig.74
11.43 Some notes on graphical reduction to centre
From paragraphs 11.41 and 11.42 above, the following rule is stated :
If the eccentric is on the left hand side of the line connecting the
station and the object, the correction "d" is positive. If the eccentric
in on the right hand side, the correction "d" is negative. To apply this
rule we must look at the station where the eccentric is located.
Each correction must be recorded in pencil in the observation book
for horizontal angles in the last column above the mean of all sets.
11.5 Closure of triangles
The computer has also to check the closure of the triangles, which means
that he has to check whether the difference between the sum of the three
angles in each triangle and 200g is not more than a certain limit.

210
 lrq &$
!!=$# u|flkmsn t/Lsfn] s]Gb|df Nofpg]nfO{ s]xL l6Kk0fLx?
dflysf cg'R5]bx? !!=$! / !!=$@ af6 lgDglnlvt lgod eGg ;lsG5 M
olb s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] j:t' / cj:yfg hf]8]sf] /]vfsf] afof+ xftkl§ 5 eg]
zf]wg ædÆ+ x'G5 . olb s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] bf+of xftlt/ 5 eg] zf]wg ædÆ – x'G5 .
of] lgodsf] nflu xfdLn] Tof] cj:yfgdf x]g'{k5{ hxfF s]Gb|af6 ;/]sf] b]vfOPsf] 5 .
k|To]s zf]wg ;a} ;]6x?sf] dWodfgsf] dfly cGt k+lQmdf ;dtnLo sf]0fx?sf]
nflu ;j]{If0f k'l:tsfdf k]lG;nn] n]Vg'k5{ .
!!=% lqsf]0fx?sf] k"0f{tf
sDKo'6/n] lqsf]0fx?sf] k"0f{tf klg hf+Rg'k5{, h;sf] dtna xf] ls pgn] hf+R5
ls k|To]s lqsf]0fdf tLg j6f sf]0fx?sf] hf]8 / @)) ugsf] cjz]if lglZrt
;LdfeGbf a9L 5}g .

211
These limits are :
First order ...............5cc ( =0.0005g)
Second order...............10cc ( =0.0010g)
Third order ...............10cc ( =0.0010g)
Fourth order ...............75cc ( =0.00075g)

For second and third order work the error may be up to twice these
limits, though not in more than about 10% of all measured triangles
in an area. Note that the decision if it is allowed to exceed these
limits or not can only be made at HQ or by Groupleader, as they have
the possibility to survey a large measured area with many triangles.
For fourth order work the error must not in any case exceed the
limitation 75cc.

To check the closure of the triangles we use TRIG. FORM 1.32,

Closure of Triangles, or TRIG, FORM 2.12, Solution of Triangles.

To do checking systematically we choose a station and check all the

triangles around it. Then we choose a second station and repeat the
process and so on. The number of selected station is always written
at the top of each figure. After checking each triangle we tick it on
the diagram, so that we can see quickly which triangles have already
been checked and which have not. In proceeding in this way, there
will of course leave some isolated triangles which have to checked
separately at the end. When all the triangles of the framework have
been checked in this way, all additional rays which are included in
this framework have also to be checked in triangles. The following
example (see fig.75) shows how to proceed in this matter.

- check the triangles round station 142, which means triangles

1 to 5,
- check the triangles round station 159, which means triangles
6 to 11,
- check the triangles round station 187, which means triangles
12 to 17,

212
oL ;Ldfx? 5g\ M
% l;=l;= -)=)))% ug_ — klxnf] bhf{sf] nflu
!) l;=l;= -)=))!) ug_ — bf];|f] bhf{sf] nflu
!) l;=l;= -)=))!) ug_ — t];|f] bhf{sf] nflu
&% l;=l;= -)=))&% ug_ — rf}yf] bhf{sf] nflu
bf];|f] / t];|f] bhf{sf] sfdsf] nflu cz'4tf oL ;Ldfx?sf] bf]Aa/;Dd x'g ;S5,
tfklg Ps If]qdf gflkPsf ;a} lqsf]0fx?sf] s/La !) k|ltzteGbf a9L xf]Og .
l6Kgf];\ ls of] ;Ldfx?eGbf a9L hfg lbO{g] jf glbOg] eGg] lg0f{o d'Vo
s]Gb| cyjf ;d'x k|d'v n] dfq lbg ;S5, lsgls pgLx?n] w]/} lqsf]0fx?;lxt
7"nf] gflkPsf If]q ;j]{If0f ug]{ ;+efjgf 5 . rf}yf] bhf{sf] sfdsf] nflu To;
cz'4tf s'g} cj:yfdf klg &% l;=l;= sf] ;LdfeGbf a9L hfg' x'Fb}g .
lqsf]0fx?sf] k"0f{tf hf+Rg xfdLn] TRIG. FORM 1.32 lqsf]0fx?sf] k"0f{tf
k|of]u ug]{5f}+, cyjf TRIG. FORM 2.12 lqsf]0fx?sf] ;dfwfg .
qmd c'g;f/ hf+Rg] sfd ug{ xfdLn] Pp6f cj:yfg 5fG5f}+ / p;sf] jl/kl/sf]
;a} lqsf]0fx? hf+R5f}+ . ta xfdLn] bf];|f] cj:yfg 5fG5f}+ / ;f]xL bf]x/ofpF5f}+
/ qmd hf/L /xG5 . 5flgPsf] cj:yfgsf] qmd ;+Vof k|To]s lrqsf] dflyaf6
;+w} n]V5f}+ . k|To]s lqsf]0f hf+r]kl5 /]vf lrqdf xfdLn] 7Ls lrGx nufp5f}+
tfls xfdLn] t'?Gt} b]Vg ;S5f}+ ls s'g lqsf]0fx? klxn] g} hf+lr;s]sf] 5 /
s'g 5}g . o;/L cl3 a9\gfn] kSsf g} s]xL Psnf] lqsf]0fx? 5f]l8Psf] x'G5
h'g clGtddf 5'§} hf+Rg'kg]{ 5 . ha o; k|sf/n] cfwf/ /rgfsf] ;a} lqsf]0fx?
hf+lr;s]sf] x'G5, o; afx]s ;a} /]vfx? klg h'g o; cfwf/ /rgfdf ;+ng
5g\ lqsf]0fx?df hf+Rg'kg]{ 5 . o;af/] s;/L cl3 a9\g] eGg]af/] tnsf]
pbfx/0f -lrq &% x]g'{;\_ n] k|:t't u5{ .
– cj:yfg !$@ sf] jl/kl/sf] lqsf]0fx? hf+Rgf];\ h;sf] dtna lqsf]0fx?
! b]lv %,
– cj:yfg !%( sf] jl/kl/sf] lqsf]0fx? hf+Rgf];\ h;sf] dtna lqsf]0fx?
^ b]lv !!,
– cj:yfg !*& sf] jl/kl/sf] lqsf]0fx? hf+Rgf];\ h;sf] dtna lqsf]0fx?
!@ b]lv !&,
213
 - check the two triangles 18 and 19 round station 118,
- check the two triangles 20 and 21 round station 158,
- check the two triangles 22 and 23 round station 189,
- check the triangle 24 at station 7,
- check the triangles defined by stations 3,5,7, stations 3,5,18
and by stations 5,7,18,

By this procedure all the observed rays will have been checked in at
least one triangle.

fig. 75

214
 – cj:yfg !!* sf] jl/kl/sf] b'O{j6f lqsf]0fx? !* / !( hf+Rgf];\,
– cj:yfg !%* sf] jl/kl/sf] b'O{j6f lqsf]0fx? @) / @! hf+Rgf];\,
– cj:yfg !*( sf] jl/kl/sf] b'O{j6f lqsf]0fx? @@ / @# hf+Rgf];\,
– cj:yfg & df lqsf]0f @$ hf+Rgf];\ .
– cj:yfg #,%,& cj:yfgx? #,%,!* / cj:yfgx? %,&,!* n]
kl/eflift lqsf]0fx? hf+Rgf];\,
o; t/Lsfn] ;a} ;j]{If0f ul/Psf /]vfx? sd;]sd Pp6f lqsf]0fdf hf+Rg
;lsg] 5 .

lrq &%
215
216
 kl/lzi6

APPENDIXES

l6Kk0fL M ;a} kl/lzi6x? k"/f cfsf/sf] ^)% k'gM pTkfbg x'g .

Note : all appendixes are reproduced 60 % of full size.

217
218
B
220
 H. M. G. SURVEY DEPARTMENT C
OBSERVATION BOOK — HORIZONTAL ANGLES
124
GRID SHEET PAGE

TRIG. FORM 1.11

222
 H. M. G. SURVEY DEPARTMENT D
OBSERVATION BOOK — HORIZONTAL ANGLES
GRID SHEET 093 3
PAGE

TRIG. FORM 1.11

224
 H. M. G. SURVEY DEPARTMENT E1
OBSERVATION BOOK — HORIZONTAL ANGLES
163
GRID SHEET Observation book I PAGE

TRIG. FORM 1.11

 H. M. G. SURVEY DEPARTMENT E2
OBSERVATION 163
BOOK — HORIZONTAL ANGLES
GRID SHEET Observation book II PAGE

TRIG. FORM 1.11

 H. M. G. SURVEY DEPARTMENT E3
OBSERVATION BOOK — HORIZONTAL ANGLES
GRID SHEET 163
Joint Observations PAGE

TRIG. FORM 1.11

228
 H. M. G. SURVEY DEPARTMENT F
OBSERVATION BOOK — ZENITHAL ANGLES
096
GRID SHEET PAGE

TRIG. FORM 1.12

230
 H. M. G. SURVEY DEPARTMENT G
OBSERVATION BOOK — ZENITHAL ANGLES
093
GRID SHEET PAGE

TRIG. FORM 1.12

232
 H. M. G. SURVEY DEPARTMENT H

AGA 8 Page......

DISTANCE MEASURING WITH GEODIMETER No 80126

TRIG. FORM 1.13

234
 I

GEODIMETER MODEL 6
NOMOGRAM FOR THE ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION

c
.
Parts ×10 -6 mm Hg.

Place a rule so that it intersects the temperature and pressure

scales at the temperature and pressure values recorded. The
correction in parts per million is read off on the center scale. For
a barometer graduated in millibars, multiply by 0.75 and use the
mm Hg scale.
 AGA GEODIMETER MODEL 8
NOMOGRAM FOR THE ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION

VALID FOR HE NE LASER, WAVELENGTH 632.8NM.

tryck
Distr.enl. SFS 509/61 p.2. Printed in Sweden
Lembke/KURIR.
Katrineholm 1.69 41331

Place a rule so that it intersects the

temperature and pressure scales at the
&

temperature and pressure values recorded.

The correction in parts per million is read
off on the center scale. For a barometer
Aaderson

graduated in millibars, multiply by 0.75 and

use the mm Hg scale.

AGA Geodimeter department

s-181 20 Lidingo, Sweden. Telephone
08/775 00 20 Telex 10565 AGATRONIC
Cables AGAFAROS

236
 J

AGA GEODIMETER
TABLES OVER K2 AND K3 VALUES,
Aaderson & Lembke/KURIR. tryck Katrineholm 2.69 41295
Distr enl.SFS 509/61P.2. Printed in Sweden

AGA Geodimeter department

s-181 20 Lidingo, Sweden. Telephone 08/775 00 20 Telex
10565 AGATRONIC Cables AGAFAROS
238
 H. M. G. SURVEY DEPARTMENT K
OBSERVATION BOOK — HORIZONTAL ANGLES
096
GRID SHEET PAGE

TRIG. FORM 1.11

240
 H. M. G. SURVEY DEPARTMENT L
OBSERVATION BOOK — HORIZONTAL ANGLES
GRID SHEET PAGE
096

TRIG. FORM 1.11

242
 H. M. G. SURVEY DEPARTMENT M
OBSERVATION BOOK — HORIZONTAL ANGLES
096
GRID SHEET PAGE

TRIG. FORM I 12

TRIG. FORM 1.11

 H. M. G. SURVEY DEPARTMENT
OBSERVATION BOOK — HORIZONTAL ANGLES
096 2
GRID SHEET PAGE

TRIG. FORM 1.11

245